Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2007-R0504 - Contract- Teinert Commercial Building Services-Office Building, Lubbock Cemetery - 10_25_2007 (3)Resolution No. 2007--RO504 October 25, 2007 Item No, 5.20 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract with Teinert Commercial Building Services of Lubbock, Texas, for construction of a new office building at the City of Lubbock Cemetery per RFP #07-726-DD, a copy of which Contract and any associated documents are attached hereto and which shall be spread upon the minutes of this Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part hereof as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this 25th day of October , 2007. D--AV�ID A. ILLER, MAYOR ATTEST: Rebe ca Garza, City Secreta APPROVED TO ONTEN . Scott Snider Assistant City Manager/Community Services APPROVED AS TO FORM: r Do Vandiver, ttorney o Counsel Mres/Cemetery-TeinertConMes October 16, 2007 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY RFP 07-726-DD Contract #8142 Plans & Specifications may be obtained from THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY littp://-pr.thereproductioncompany.com/ "OQ-7-- R.(.)SOL/ "A City of Planned Progress" CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas City of Lubbock PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE SUITE 102, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 16251.3 STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2168 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us RFP07-726-DD, Addendum # 1 ADDENDUM # 1 RFP 07-726-DD CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMENTERY DATE ISSUED: July 19, 2007 CLOSE DATE: August 2, 2007 @ 8:00 A.M. 1. In General Instructions to Offeror's, paragraph 32, Basis of Proposals and Selection Criteria, CHANCE subparagraph 32.2 to read as follows: 32. BASIS OF PROPOSALS AND SELECTION CRITERIA The City of Lubbock will use the Competitive Sealed Proposals procurement method as authorized by the Texas Legislature and further defined by Texas Local Government Code Section 271.116. The selection criteria used to evaluate each proposal will include the following: 32.1 40% Price. 32.2 30% CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS. Complete and submit the enclosed "Statement of Qualifications" (two pages) with your proposal. The City shall have an opportunity to interview the proposed job superintendent at a time to be named after receipt of proposals. Offeror's are not required to submit resume and references with their proposal submittal. 32.3 10% Safety Record Questionnaire. 32.4 20% Construction time. The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is $180,000 Proposals shall be made using the enclosed proposal submittal form. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Darlene Doss, Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 RFP07-726-Ddadi s RFP07-726-DD, Addendum # I }}I I Z)"&M Darlene Doss Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the offeror's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Officer if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Interim Public Works Contracting Officer no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. RFP07-726-Ddad I 2 CITY OF LUBBOCK Statement of Qualifications RFP07-726-DD CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY Candidates must complete each of the following items in order to be considered. 1. FIRM NAME: Teinert Commercial Building Services 2. BUSINESS ADDRESS: 4009 Clovis Rd Lubbock, TX 79415 3 4. 5. TELEPHONE, WITH AREA CODE: 806-744-2801 FAX, WITH AREA CODE: 806-744-2401 EMAILADDRESS: aaron@teinert.com INTERNET URL ADDRESS: TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: (CHECK ONE) a. SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP ( ) b. PARTNERSHIP ( ) c. CORPORATION ( X ) d. JOINT VENTURE ( ) PRINCIPALS (P) AND ASSOCIATES (A): (WRITE "P" OR "A" FOR EACH) DEGREE OR NAME P/A CERTIFICATE a. Allen Teinert P b. C. d. e. f. INSTITUTION *****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL***** --munVI BE,uBME' fED WITH BED / PROPOSAL***** 6. CITY OF LUBBOCK STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS CONTINUED LIST 5 MAJOR PROJECTS WITHIN THE PAST THREE YEARS THAT ILLUSTRATE YOUR EXPERIENCE WITH PROJECTS SIMILAR TO THE CITY'S. PROJECT a. Teinert Metals b. American State Bank C. Briarwood Villiage d. Bodyworks e. Ashmore Insurance OWNER YEAR COST Randy Teinert 2006 $1.5 million ASB 2005 $2.5 million Shuler Properties 2007 $1.8 million Graco 2006 $1.5 million Will Ashmore 2007 $1 million 7. REFERENCES: (INCLUDE AT LEAST THREE REFERENCES FROM THREE PROJECTS SIMILAR TO THE ONE FOR WHICH YOU ARE COMPETING) NAME RELATIONSHIP PHONE NUMBER a. Harry Zimmerman ASB 806-767-7000 b Ron Childress Graco 806-745-9718 C. Michael Brian Shuler Properties 770-303-8200 � � SUBMITTED BY: Signature: Date: August 2, 2007 Printed Name:Aaro HTitle:Project Manager Firm Name: Teineit Commercial Building Services Tel#: 806-744-2801 Address: 4009 Clovis Road, Lubbock State: TX ZiP:_79415 *****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL***** City of Lubbock PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE SUITE 102, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 1) STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH:(806)775-2168 FAX:(806)775-3326 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us DATE ISSUED: CLOSE DATE: ADDENDUM #2 RFP 07-726-DD CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY July 24, 2007 August 2, 2007 @ 8:00 A.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. In the section GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT, paragraph 34 TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES CHANGE to read as follows: If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) per consecutive calendar day, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working clay that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work.. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Darlene Doss, Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-3326 or Email to cldossi,'i;mv(ubbock.us. THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Darlene Doss Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the offeror's responsibility to advise the Citv of Lubbock Public Works Contractine Office if anv laneuaee. reauirements. etc.. or anv combinations thereof. inadvertentiv restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Public Works Contracting Office no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. RFP07-726-DDad2 City of Lubbock PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE SUITE 102, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2168 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us RFP# 07-726-DD, Addendum # 3 ADDENDUM # 3 RFP # 07-726-DD CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY DATE ISSUED: July 27, 2007 CLOSE DATE: August 2, 2007 @ 8:00 A.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Offeror's attention is invited to the Engineer's Addendum #3, attached. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Darlene Doss, Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Email to ddoss �i-rnvlubbock.us. THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK )44& 2e V"4 Darlene Doss Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the offeror's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Public Works Contractina Office if anv laneuaee, requirements, etc., or anv combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a siny-le source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Public Works Contracting Office no later than five (5) business days prior to the proposal close date. A review of such notifications will be made. RFP# 07-726-DDad3 ADDENDUM NUMBER PROJECT: PROJECT NO: LOCATION. ARCHITECT: DATE: All bidders corrections t a part of th Please acknow ITEM #1 Fo 'p New Cemetery Office for The City of Lubbock. Contract #7598 898-07 2011 East 31'- Street Lubbock, Texas Cox/Dirks, Architects, PC 1710 15th Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Telephone (806)762-1226 Fax (806) 762-1257 July 27, 2007 1 e COX/DIRKS ARCHITECTS, PC PAGE - City of Lubbock PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE ROOM 204, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 1-3 STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2168 FAX: (806)775-3326 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us DATE ISSUED: CLOSE DATE: RFP# 07-726-DD, Addendum # 4 ADDENDUM # 4 RFP # 07-726-DD CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY August 1, 2007 August 2, 2007 @ 8:00 A.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Offeror's attention is invited to the Engineer's Addendum #4, attached. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Darlene Doss, Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Email to ddoss@mv]Libbock-.us. THANK YOU, eCIITY OF LUBBOCK e Darlene Doss Buyer It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the offeror's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Public Works Contractina Office if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Interim Public Works Contracting Office no later than five (5) business days prior to the proposal close date. A review of such notifications will be made. RFP# 07-726-DDad4 ADDENDUM NUMBER 4 PROJECT: New Cemetery Office for - tip' the City of Lubbock Contract 47596 PROJECT NO: 898-07{' LOCATION: 2011 East 31 Street` Lubbock, Texas ` ARCHITECT; Cox/Dirks, Architects, PC , f 1710 15th Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 �t Telephone (806)762-1226 Fax (806) 762-1257 DATE: July 30, 2007 All bidders are asked to note the following changes, additions, omissions, and/or corrections to the original bidding documents. Instructions issued in this Addendum are a part of the contract, and bidders are asked to adjust their proposal accordingly. Please acknowledge all Addenda on your proposal: ITEM #1 SHEET #A2 - DOOR SCHEDULE Revise Door Schedule Mark 401 such that frame material is wood in lieu of indicated aluminum. COV DIRKS ARCHITECTS, PC PAGE - _ CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY RFP 07-726-DD Contract #8142 Plans & Specifications may be obtained from THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY http://pr.thereproductioncompauy.com/ "A City of Planned Progress " CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas CITY OF LUBBOCK REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS FOR TITLE: CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ►lil►i : I bf►� PROJECT NUMBER: 92071.8302.20000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE A III *****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL***** III City of Lubbock, TX Public Works Contracting Office Contractor Checklist for RFP # 07-726-DD M Before submitting your proposal, please ensure you have completed the following: 1. x Carefully read and understand the plans and specifications and properly complete the PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM. Proposal submittal form MUST be completed in blue or black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and by hand. Amounts shall be written in both words and numerals and in the event of a discrepancy the amounts written in words shall govern. Include corporate seal and Secretary's signature. Identify addenda received (if any). Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 2. x Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 3. x Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. All "YES" responses must be explained in detail and submitted with Bid / Proposal. ' 4. x Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include firm Is FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCL4L SECURITY number. 5. x Carefully read the BASIS OF PROPOSALS and EVALUATION CRITERIA in paragraph 32 of the General Instructions to Offeror's. Ensure ALL criteria are addressed . in your submittal. Complete and submit the "Statement of Qualifications" with your proposal. 6. x Clearly mark the proposal number, title, due date and time and your company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. 7. x Include PROPOSAL BOND or CASHIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK as your proposal surety. Failure to provide a proposal surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your proposal. 8. x Ensure your proposal is RECEIVED by the City. of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office prior to the deadline. Late proposals will not be accepted. FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN YOUR PROPOSAL BEING DEEMED NON -RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL. Teinert Commercial Building Services (Please type or print company / firm name) III*****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL***** City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office In an effort to better serve our suppliers, the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office is conducting the following survey. We appreciate the time and effort expended to submit your offer. Please take an additional moment to complete the information below. If you have any questions or need more information, please call (806)775-2163. City of Lubbock RFP #07-726-DD HOW DID YOU RECEIVE NOTICE OF THIS REQUEST FOR BID OR PROPOSAL? Lubbock Avalanche Journal? Yes No The Daily Commercial Record? Yes No From Plan Room or other type of service? X Yes No Did you access the City of Lubbock website to search for bids? Yes No Facsimile or email from RFP Depot.com? . Yes No Did you download from your home computer? Yes No Did you download from your company computer? Yes No Requested a copy from Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office? Yes No Are you a member of RFP Depot? Yes No Other: THANK YOU. Teinert Commercial Building Services (Please Print or Type Company Name) r INDEX 1. NOTICE TO OFFERORS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 3. TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE § 271.116 4. PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL - PROPOSAL FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACT 4.1 Contractor Checklist 4.2 Proposal Submittal Form 4.3 City of Lubbock Insurance Requirement Affidavit 4.4 Safety Record Questionnaire 4.5 Suspension and Debarment Certification 4.6 City of Lubbock Statement of Qualifications 5. PAYMENT BOND 6. PERFORMANCE BOND 7. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE S. CONTRACT 9. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 10. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 11. SPECIFICATIONS NOTICE TO OFFERORS NOTICE TO OFFERORS RFP #07-726-DD Sealed proposals addressed to Bruce MacNair, Public Works Contracting Officer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Public Works Contracting Officer, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 8:00 A.M. on August 2, 2007 , or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described "CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened in the office of the Public Works Contracting Officer and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the offeror to ensure that his proposal is actually in the office of the Public Works Contracting Officer for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Proposals are due at 8:00 A.M. on August 2, 2007 , and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the proposals on August 23, 2007, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all proposals and waive any formalities. The successful offeror will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful offeror will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety .company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to him. FAILURE OF THE OFFEROR TO INCLUDE PROPOSAL SECURITY WITH THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NONRESPONSIVE PROPOSAL AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL. It shall be each offeror's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all - local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the proposal submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre - proposal conference on July _ 24, 2007 at 11:00 A.M., at City of Lubbock Cemetery, 2011 East 31" Street, Offerors may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, 2102 Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at ht!p:Hpr.thereproductioncompany.com/. ONE SET OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100 REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770. Deposit Checks shall be made payable to The City of Lubbock, and will be refunded if documents are returned in good condition within Sixty (60) days of the opening of Proposals. Additional sets of plans and specifications may be obtained at the proposer's expense. Attention of each offeror is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Public Works Contracting Officer of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to offerors. Each offerors attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all offerors that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit proposals in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre - proposal meetings and proposal openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance, please contact the Public Works Contracting Office at (806) 775-2163 or write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK Ewe ? &M= BRUCE MACNAIR, PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICER GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 1 PROPOSAL DELIVERY TIME & DATE The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive proposals to furnish CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed proposals will be received no later than 8:00 A.M. CST, Aueust 2, 2007 at the office listed below. Any proposal received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the proposer. Each proposal and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "RFP#07-726-DD, CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY "and the proposal opening date and time. Offerors must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Proposals must be addressed to: Darlene Doss - Buyer City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting 1625 13th Street, Room 204 ._ Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.1 Offerors are responsible for making certain proposals are delivered to the Public Works Contracting Office. Mailing of a proposal does not ensure that it will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If offeror does not hand deliver proposal, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.2 Proposals will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No proposals will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX PROPOSALS. 1.3 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening proposals through an addendum. 2 PRE -PROPOSAL MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing offerors with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Request for Proposals (RFP) documents, a non - mandatory are -proposal conference will be held on July 24, 2007 at 11:00 A.M., at the City of Lubbock Cemetery, 2011 East 31" Street, MAINTENANCE SHOP located in the South East Section inside the Cemetery, Lubbock, Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective offeror they represent. 2.2 It is the offeror's responsibility to attend the pre -proposal meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre - proposal meeting to offerors who do not attend the pre -proposal meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the RFP are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at http://www.RFPdepot.com. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most up blic libraries. 3.2 Any offeror in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Public Works Contracting Office. At the request of the offeror, or in the event the Public Works Contracting Office deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Public Works Contracting Office. Such addenda issued by the Public Works Contracting Office will be available over the Internet at http://www.RFPdepot.com and will become part of the proposal package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original RFP. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office no later than five (5) days before the proposal closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office in writing or in this RFP should be used in preparing proposal responses. All contacts that a offeror may have had before or after receipt of this RFP with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this proposal should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to offerors. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each offeror shall carefully examine all RFP documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a proposal to ensure that their proposal meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a proposal, each offeror shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Request for Proposals. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the offeror from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Request for Proposals. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Public Works Contracting Officer and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Public Works Contracting Officer prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the offeror fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If offeror does not notify the Public Works Contracting Officer before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than rive (5) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. 5 PROPOSAL PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this RFP does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred f in the preparation and submission of a proposal. 5.2 The issuance of this RFP does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a proposal shall be paid by the offeror. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your proposal to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your proposal is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your proposal that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire proposal CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES PERMITS TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the offeror is or may be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective offerors are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their proposal submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The offeror shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this proposal, the offeror certifies and represents to the City the offeror has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this proposal. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All offerors shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 1 I PLANS FOR USE BY OFFERORS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a proposal on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a proposal without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents may be __: examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Offerors. 12 OFFEROR INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the offerors responsibility to advise the Public Works Contracting Officer if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Public Works Contracting Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the proposal closing date. A review of such notifications will be.made. 12.2 NO OFFEROR ` SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTSFOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION' OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE` (5) CALENDAR' DAYS PRIOR TO THE PROPOSAL CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: Darlene Doss, Buyer City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office 1625 131h Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: 806-775-2164 or 806-767-2275 Email: ddoss(iDm ylubbock.us RFPDepot: http://www.RFPdepot.com 13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within TWO HUNDRED FORTY (240) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful offeror. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General I Conditions of the contract documents. 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no �_ claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. r E 16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to ten sets of plans and specifications and related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the proposals have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of an offeror the following information: (a) The experience record of the offeror showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the offeror. (c) Equipment schedule. 20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 23 EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having i structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 24 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful offeror shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful offeror shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 25 INSURANCE 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each offeror is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The offeror' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the offeror's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated proposal price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the offeror without being considered. 29 PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL 29.1 The offeror shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the offeror shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 29.2 If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Offerors, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Offeror's name 28.3.2 Proposal for (description of the project). 29.4 Proposal submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the proposals, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. 30 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by offeror shall be bound and include the following: " (a) Notice to Offerors. (b) General Instructions to Offerors. (c) Offeror's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. (j) All other documents made available to offeror for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 31 QUALIFICATIONS OF OFFERORS The offeror may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The offeror may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the offeror's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the offeror to perform the work, and the offeror shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The offeror's proposal may be deemed not to meet specifications or the proposal may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the offeror fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and 32 33 to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the offeror's qualifications shall include but not be limited to: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the offeror to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the offeror. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past three (3) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. BASIS OF PROPOSALS AND SELECTION CRITERIA The City of Lubbock will use the Competitive Sealed Proposals procurement method as authorized by the Texas Legislature and further defined by Texas Local Government Code Section 271.116. The selection criteria used to evaluate each proposal will include the following: 32.1 40% Price. 32.2 30% Contractor qualifications. Resume and references of proposed job superintendent. City shall have an opportunity to interview the job superintendent at a time to be named after receipt of proposals. 32.3 10% Safety Record Questionnaire. 32.4 20% Construction time. The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is 180 000. Proposals shall be made using the enclosed Proposal Form. SELECTION 33.1 Selection shall be based on the responsible offeror whose proposal is determined to be the most advantageous to the City of Lubbock considering the relative importance of evaluation factors included in this RFP. 33.2 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL. 33.3 The City shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the City based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The City and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the City is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the City shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. 33.4 In determining best value for the City, the City is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. 33.5 A proposal will be subject to being considered irregular and inay be rejected if it shows omissions, alterations of form, conditional alternate proposals, additions or alternates in lieu of the items specified, if the unit prices are obviously unbalanced (either in excess of or below reasonably expected values), or irregularities of any kind. " TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE § 271.116 SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS 4_J § 271.116. SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS. (a) In selecting a contractor through competitive sealed proposals for construction, rehabilitation, alteration, or repair services for a facility or for construction of a project to which Section 252.043(d-1) applies, a governmental entity shall follow the procedures prescribed by this section. (b) The governmental entity shall select or designate an engineer or architect to prepare construction documents for the project. The selected or designated engineer or architect has full responsibility for complying with Chapter 1001 or 1051, Occupations Code, as applicable. If the engineer or architect is not a full-time employee of the governmental entity, the governmental entity shall select the engineer or architect on the basis of demonstrated competence and qualifications as provided by Section 2254.004, Government Code. (c) The governmental entity shall provide or contract for, independently of the contractor, the inspection services, the testing of construction materials engineering, and the verification testing services necessary for acceptance of the facility or project by the governmental entity. The governmental entity shall select those services for which it contracts in accordance with Section 2254.004, Government Code, and shall identify them in the request for proposals. (d) The governmental entity shall prepare a request for competitive sealed proposals that includes construction documents, selection criteria, estimated budget, project scope, schedule, and other information that contractors may require to respond to the request. The governmental entity shall state in the request for proposals the selection criteria that will be used in selecting the successful offeror. (e) The governmental entity shall receive, publicly open, and read aloud the names of the offerors and, if any are required to be stated, all prices stated in each proposal. Not later than the 45th day after the date of opening the proposals, the governmental entity shall evaluate and rank each proposal submitted in relation to the published selection criteria. (f) The governmental entity shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the goverrunental entity based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The governmental entity shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The governmental entity and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the governmental entity is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the governmental entity shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. (g) In determining best value for the governmental entity, the governmental entity is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL LUhe SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT _j DATE:. "itust -2. "2007 PROJECT NUMBER: 07-726.Ob CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY Proposal of Teinert C6z=erc"1 .Building- Services (hereinafter called Offeror) To the Honorable Mayor and Cily Council City of Lubbock, Texi (d er callotOwnei) -Ladies and Gentlemen:. .'The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals .for the construction of a CONSTRUCTION OF NE�V OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors; notice to offerers and all other related contract documents and the site of the irsended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and m construct the project in accordance with the plans, .specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at tha price stated -below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in;performing the work required under the contract documents.. BASE PROPOSAL Includes coordination of the entice work of the project; including preparation of general coordination drawings, diagrams and schedules, "and control of site Wilize0on, from:beginning of constriction activity through project close-out and warranty periods. The work inch,des . poured reinforced concrete foundation and slab -on -grade, conventional wood framing with brick veneer and EIFS wall finish, cast stone columns and trim, .cement board.and wood trim and laminated asphalt roofing. The work includes solid core doors, hollow metal f =es, hardware, masonry and drywall, Interior patricians, interior finishes and cabinetry. M ° The workincludes standard plumbing, heating -ventilating -air conditioning, electrical, lighting, communications, and signal systems- MATERIALS: Twenty Seven Thousand nine Hundred Eighty Three- &00/0917,.983.00 ) " SERVICES:One Hirndred'Ninety Six Thousand Seventeen & 00/100 ($196,017.00 TOTAL BASE PROPOSAL: Two Hundred Twenty. Four Thousend S 00[100($224,000.00 s . t�psab da0 be dam h M& Wwd1 and ■Raeealc. Ia cue of di axpe.W, tie aapat Yliawa is wweds duo wwo.) ' Offeror's Initials , L ADDITIVE ALTERNATE Omit asphalt goof s imgl�i imd undcrlayme� Install MBCI #IB 12 24ga. Kynar 500 Roof paneis,accessories and trim over "Metal Mate" underlayment on plywood .deck. MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) L TOTAL ADDITIVE ALTERNATE Four Thousand Three Hundred tifl0/10�s' 4,306.00 _ ) (Aeauts iaD ba>iaw� d 6o�Y weeds ad'oseraL Lease �[dierepucf. tie a t mown to wordy S"N sa+em) TOTAL BASE pROPOSAL AND ADDITIVE ALTERNATE: MATERIALS: S Offeror hereby agrees to commence .tire ao* on'the above projecit On a' date tit be specified i0i written "Notice to. Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the ptojed within ( 150. ) # Dave CompkNed by Contractor ( One Hundred Fifty. Days I (win Dave Comuieted by Contractor) days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and. other contract documents. Offeror hereby further gees to pay to Owner 4s liquidated.dama$es the sdm.of S-250 (IM HUNDRED NIP1"SF.) for each consecutive calendar day in'excew of the tine sea forth herein above fbr oompledon of this project, af as more fully .sea forth in the general conditions of the j contract documents. Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with r instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Ofi'erom Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the. right to reject any or all proposals and -to waive any formality in •the p' oposmg. . The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a'penod of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offemr.hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the .. — plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to. commence work on the date spwified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. OM ors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond,is required, to submit a'cashices check or certified -check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a -reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract,, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Offeror's initials 2 L i t Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) . or a Bid/Proposal Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. Date: August 1, 2007 Authorized Signature Allen Teinert (Seal if Offeror is a Corporation) (Printed or Typed Name) AM�� Teinert Commercial Building Services Company - 4009 Clovis Road Secretary Address Lubbock Lubbock Offeror acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: City, County Texas 79415 Addenda No. 1 Date 7-25-07 State Zip Code Addenda No. �— Date7-24-07 Telephone: 806 _ 744-2801 Addenda No. 3.__ Date 7-27-07 Fax: 806 _ 744-2401 Addenda No. 4 Date 8-1-07 FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 75-1803657 M/WBE Firm:. Woman Black American I I Native American Hispanic American I I Asian Pacific American I I Other (Specify) 3 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT (Must Be Submitted With Proposal Submittal) To Be Completed by Offeror and Agent And Attached to Proposal Submittal I, the undersigned Offeror, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this proposal document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this proposal. Allen Teinert Con r (Signature) Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Teinert Commercial Building Services (Print or Type) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 4009 Clovis Road Lubbock;. Texas 79415 Name of AgentBrokev QUISENBERRY b ASSOCIATES, INC. Agent / Broker (Signature) Address of Agent/Broker: 4601 66TH STREET SUITE B City/State/Zip: LUBBOCK TX' 79414 Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 806 ) 793--8773 Date: 08/01/07 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this proposal and award the contract -to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Public Works Contracting Office for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2168. PROPOSAL #07-726-DD - CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY 4 SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE (Must Be Submitted With Proposal Submittal) The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. Pursuant to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of an offeror prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of an offeror for this consideration shall be: The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety -record of the offerors in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among other things: a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC), against the offeror for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or ' regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state .or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final - , orders, and judicial final judgments. C. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in bodily harm or death. d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the offeror and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the proposal documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees of offeror and the citizens of the City of Lubbock. In order to obtain proper information from offerors so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that offerors answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their proposals: _ QUESTION ONE Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations -of OSHA within the past three (3) years? YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number one above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: LL j Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. Offeror's Initials 5 QUESTION TWO Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number two above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION THREE Has the offeror, orthe firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted in serious bodily injury or death? YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number three above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction:. . Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty assessed. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire will be investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my proposal to be rejected. Signature President Title 6 SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION (Must Be Submitted.With Proposal Submittal) Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of $25,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of $25,600 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. I, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. COMPANY NAME: Teinert Commercial Building Services FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITNqN 75-1803657 'Signature of Company Official: Printed name of company official signing above: Allen Teinert Date Signed: August 1, 2007 CrrY OF LUBBOCK Statement of Qualifications RFP07-726-DD CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY Candidates must complete each of the following items in order to be considered. 1. FIRM NAME: Teinert Commercial Building Services 2. BUSINESS ADDRESS: 4009 Clovis Rd Lubbock, TX 79415 3. TELEPHONE, WITH AREA CODE: 806-744-2801 FAX, WITH AREA CODE: 806-744-2401 . E MAIL ADDRESS: aaron@ te inert. com INTERNET URL ADDRESS: 4. TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: (CHECK ONE) a. SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP ( ) b. PARTNERSHIP ( ) c. CORPORATION ( X ) d. JOINT VENTURE ( ) 5. PRINCIPALS (P) AND ASSOCIATES (A): (WRITE "P" OR "A" FOR EACH) NAME a. Allen Teinert b. C. d. e. f. DEGREE OR P/A CERTIFICATE P INSTITUTION *****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL***** *****MUST' BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL***** 6. CITY OF LUBBOCK STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS CONTINUED LIST 5 MAJOR PROJECTS WITHIN THE PAST THREE YEARS THAT ILLUSTRATE YOUR EXPERIENCE WITH PROJECTS SIMILAR TO THE CITY'S. PROJECT a. Teinert Metals b. American State Bank C. Briarwo6d Villiage d. Bodyworks e. Ashmore Insurance OWNER YEAR COST Randy Teinert 2006 $1.5 million ASB 2005 $2.5 million Shuler Properties 2007 $1.8 million Graco 2006 $1.5 million Will Ashmore 2007 $1 million 7. REFERENCES: (INCLUDE AT LEAST THREE REFERENCES FROM THREE PROJECTS SIMILAR TO THE ONE FOR WHICH YOU ARE COMPETING) NAME RELATIONSHIP PHONE NUMBER a. Harry Zimmerman ASB 806-767-7000 b Ron Childress Graco 806-745-9718 C. Michael Brian Shuler Properties 770-303-8200 � SUBMITTED BY: Signature: Date: August 2, 2007 Printed Name:AareHil� Title: Proj ect Manager Firm Name:Teinert Commercial Building Services Tel#: 806-744-2801 Address: 4009 Clovis Road, Lubbock State: TX Zip: 79415 *****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL***** i, uw uao..... m �u�.N ,...._ ...._ PAYMENT BOND 1 1 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE BOND NO. 5000882 (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) TEINERT COMMERCIAL BUILDING SE�jV�ES KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter ca1l1le t e Yrincipal(s), as Principal(s), and SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY (hereinafter called the Surety (s as Sure t s are heldR rml b u to he Ci ock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of SEVVENTY��ND NO�1r�E�-�-�����ol�als ( lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 2 5 TH day of OCTOBER ,2007,toPROPOSAL #07-726-DD CONTRACT #8142 CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. _, NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 6TH day of NOVEMBER 20 07 . SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY Surety *By: tLe.-Q.,i A-X (Title) DEEDEE BRINKER ATTORNEY -IN -FACT TEINERT COMMERCIAL BUILDING (Company Name) SERVICES By: ALLEN TEINERT (Printed Nacwl (Signature) PRESIDENT (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates DEEDEE BRINKER an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices maybe delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY Surety *By: (Title)DEEDEE BRINKER ATTORNEY —IN —FACT _..n Approved as to form: City of Lubbock J� A Qr no< <-( C-11 ity Attorne * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. Il 2 PERFORMANCE BOND STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE BOND NO. 5 0 0 0 8 8 2 (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) TEINERT COMMERCIAL BUILDING SERVICES KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY (hereinafter called the Surety((sl_O sHUNty(s are held and firmlyy�bound unto the Cityof Lubbock (hereinafter called the m� 17)2)� FOURTEEN THOUSA Obligee), in the amount of SgIlgN-TY ANU NO / i--------- oll�ts $ lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the25THJay of OCTOBER ,2007,to PROPOSAL #07-726—DD CONTRACT #8142 CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 6TH day of NOVEMBER , 20 0 7 . TEINERT COMMERCIAL SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY BUILDING SERVICES Surety *By:. (Title) DEEDEE BRINKER ATTORNEY —IN —FACT (Company Name) By: ALLEN TEINERT (Printe n ) (Signature) PRESIDENT (Title) f ri Thep g�pA fig ,company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby ' designates an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. I SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY 1 Surety Approved as to Form City ofj,ubbock By: Ci y ttorn *By: Aa:LA— � ¢�.... (Title))EEDEE BRINKER ATTORNEY —IN —FACT I * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. FA I SureTec Insurance Company THIS BOND RIDER CONTAINS IMPORTANT COVERAGE INFORMATION Statutory Complaint Notice To obtain information or make a complaint: You may call the Surety's toll free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-866-732-0099. You may also write to the Surety at: SureTec Insurance Company 9737 Great Hills Trail, Suite 320 Austin, Tx 78759 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverage, rights or complaints at 1-800-252-3439. You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at: PO Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax#: 512-475-1771 Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us Email: ConsumerProtection@tdi.state.tx.us PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should contact the Surety first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. Terrorism Risks Exclusion The Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the surety shall not be liable for, losses caused by acts of terrorism, riot, civil insurrection, or acts of war. Exclusion of Liability for Mold, Mycotoxins, Fungi & Environmental Hazards The Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the surety thereon shall not be liable for, molds, living or dead fungi, bacteria, allergens, histamines, spores, hyphae, or mycotoxins, or their related products or parts, nor for any environmental hazards, bio-hazards, hazardous materials, environmental spills, contamination, or cleanup, nor the remediation thereof, nor the consequences to persons, property, or the performance of the bonded obligations, of the occurrence, existence, or appearance thereof. POA #: 5000882 SureTec Insurance Company LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY Knots All Men by Tleese Presents, That SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY (the "Company"), a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and having its principal office in Houston, Harris County, Texas, does by these presents make, constitute and appoint Dee Dee Brinker its true and lawful Attorney -in -fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include waivers to the conditions of contracts and consents of surety for: Principal: Allen Teinert Construction Co. dba Teinert Commercial Building Services Obligee: City of Lubbock, TX Amount: $ 214,170.00 and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney -in -Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolutions of the Board of Directors of the SureTec Insurance Company: He it Resolved, that the President, any Vice -President, any Assistant Vice -President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: Attorney -in -Fact may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and of behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, rewgnizances, contracts, agreements or indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary. Be it Resolved, that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. (Adopted at a meeting held on 20'h of April, 1999) In Witness Whereof, SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its President, and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 1st day of April, A.D. 2007. NUNmNNy SURETECINS CE COMPANY ~ W t $€ B.J. Ki eside State of Texas ss: 7� 4 Co County of Harris ........ On this 1st day of April, A.D. 2007 before me personally came R.J. King, to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Houston, Texas, that he is President of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, the company described in and which executed the- above instrument; that he knows the seal of said Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company; and that he signed his name thereto by like order. aHONDA MCCARY F � Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires �. 7aFt September 11, 2010 Rhouda McCary, Notary Publ My commission expires September 11, 2010 I, M. Brent Beaty, Assistant Secretary of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Company, which is still in full force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Board of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full Force and effect. Given under my hand -and the seal of said Company at Houston, Texas this 6th day of November 2007 , A.D. /v ��A� M. Brent Beaty, Assistant kretary Any instrument issued in excess of the penalty stated above is totally void and without any validity. For verification of the authority of this power you may call (713) 812-0800 any business day between 8:00 am and 6:00 pm CST. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE I CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: 11/07/07 P.O. BOX 2000, Room 204 RFPP U /- —DD _ LUBBOCK, TX 79457 ALLEN TEINERT TYPE OF PROJECT: CONSTRUCTION OF THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT CONSTRUCTION AIMMFRCTAI. BUILDING sERVICEc(Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY A Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ 2,000,000 0 Claims Made 85303519 04/26/07 04/26/08 Products-Comp/OpAGG$2.000-000 N Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ , ❑ Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence $6 0 Fire Damage (Any one�UO , O00 Med Exp (Any one Person) 5,000 $ AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY I Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ 1,000,000 0 All Owned Autos 85303519 04/26/07 04/26/08 Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ ❑ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ 9 Hired Autos Property Damage $ 74 Non -Owned Autos 11 GARAGE LIABILITY 0 Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ ❑ Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ IQ BUILDERS RISK It 100% of the Total Contract Price 0 INSTALLATIONFLOATER BR61588358 05/01/05 CONTINUOUS $ 214,170 $ EXCESSLIABILITY 9 Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ 1,000,00 85303519 04/26/07 04/26/08 Aggregate $ ❑ Other Than Umbrella Form WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY , The Proprietont 9 Included TSF0010036703 03/26/07 03/26/08 Statutory Limits Partners/Executive 0 Excluded Each Accident $ 1.000.000 Officers are: Disease Policy Limit $ 1 000,000 0 000 Disease -Each Employee $ OTHER The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or a cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advanc of c lation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE (Name of Insurer) MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK r By: BRENT COKER LJ Title: AGENT The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as a Primary Additional Insured on General Liability and Automobile Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Lubbock. CG 71 52 05 06 ULTRA LIABILITY PLUS ENDORSEMENT COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EXTENSION ENDORSEMENT SUMMARY OF COVERAGES This is a summary of the various additional coverages and coverage modifications provided by this endorsement. No coverage is provided by this summary. • Coverage for non -owned watercraft is extended to 51 feet in length • Voluntary Property Damage Coverage $5,000 Occurrence with a $10,000 Aggregate • Care, Custody and Control Property Damage Coverage $25,000 Occurrence with a $100,000 Aggregate - $500 Deductible • Product Recall Expense $25,000 Each Recall Limit with a $50,000 Aggregate - $1,000 Deductible • Water Damage Legal Liability - $25,000 Increase in Supplementary Payments: Bail Bonds to $1,000 and Loss of Earnings to $500 For newly formed or acquired organizations - extend the reporting requirement to 180 days • Automatic Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - Automatic Status When Required in Construction Agreement With You • Automatic Additional Insured - Vendors • Automatic Additional Insured - Lessor of Leased Equipment Automatic Status When Required in Lease Agreement With You • Automatic Additional Insured - Managers or Lessor of Premises • Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured • Additional Insured - Employee Injury to Another Employee Primary Additional Insured Expanded Fire Legal Liability to include Explosion, Lightning and Sprinkler Leakage • Automatically included - Aggregate Limits of Insurance (per location) • Automatically included - Aggregate Limits of Insurance (per project) • Knowledge of occurrence - Knowledge of an 'occurrence", "claim or suit' by your agent, servant or employee shall not in itself constitute knowledge of the named insured unless an officer of the named insured has received such notice from the agent, servant or employee ' Unintentional failure to disclose all hazards. If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards existing at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. However, this provision does not affect our right to collect additional premium or exercise our right of cancellation or non -renewal. ' Liberalization Condition Mobile equipment to include snow removal, road maintenance and street cleaning equipment less than 1,000 Ibs GVW ' Blanket Waiver of Subrogation Property Damage - Borrowed Equipment Property Damage Liability - Elevators Bodily Injury Redefined Extended Property Damage Damage to Media Legal Liability - $50,000 REFER TO THE ACTUAL ENDORSEMENT FOLLOWING ON PAGES 2 THROUGH 15 FOR CHANGES AFFECTING YOUR INSURANCE PROTECTION j. e! CG 71 52 05 06 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 15 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: P.O. BOX 2000, Room 204 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence $ ❑ Fire Damage (Any one Fire) $ Med Exp (Any one Person) $ AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ 1 All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ U Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ 11 Hired Autos Property Damage $ 11 Non -Owned Autos GARAGE LIABILITY Ci Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ l Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ I BUILDER'S RISK 100% of the Total Contract Price $ i INSTALLATION FLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY _. Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ i Other Than Umbrella Form $ WORKERS COMPENSA TION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY The Proprietor/ L' Included Statutory Limits Partners/Executive Ll Excluded Each Accident $ Officers are: Disease Policy Limit $ Disease -Each Employee $ OTHER The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE (Name of Insurer) MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK By Title: The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as a Primary Additional Insured on General Liability and Automobile Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Lubbock. 1 CONTRACTORCHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental_ entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both - English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage - showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the a_a provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 3 CONTRACT w R FP # 0 7-721 6-D D Scope Modillication and Am-ociated Cost Adjustments Total Base Proposal: NEGOTIATED FIVNIS Site, M-11101tioll &,] lc(' Rkvwtj) saw cultillu. lrenchin.:! & backl-"Fri: al S(,I.\,I(,C. 11110s In 11%.,w (%I holm!- 'W L111.1111ill Lill I in 11CLI '011-SPCCifiCli Ttllal (Ii.-thict 1111111 svollu 111i'difivAlol, I-olal Revised PI-0110S.11 ILMOL111t Anficipak:d Datc to (-omiell for Ticnien Lot/ w0slev 1). bklerelt, Direelor cot" 5"' -4 5 : 11 ..,_ ...) Do&ict 661 A.,filt, I ...,t if: Dcduct S 214.170.00 le'XI-SI'D 7 Dalc CONTRACT #8142 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 25`h day of October, 2007 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and TEINERT COMMERCIAL BUILDING SERVICES of the City LU13BOCK, County of LUBBOCK, and the State of TEXAS hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: PROPOSAL #07-726-DD - CONSTRUCTION OF NEW OFFICE AT CITY CEMETERY - $214,170.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. TEINERT COMMERCIAL BUILDING SERVICES'S proposal dated AUGUST 2, 2007 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. CONTRACTOR: CITY OF LUBB E T AS( ): �O t�OMn—G.✓C_.�N1 /"utGd/..-.•ti c>e."trc� Rc'�-----� MAYOR By: ATTEST: PRINTED N E: / T� TITLE: a� --I?a COMPLETE ADDRESS: n Company Address . Do,. ?2'7 City, State, Zi7C 9-Q 3 ATTEST: Corporate Sl�pta Owner's Representative - W&4 b - 10 Director � w#e NIX ►r3� ��t�LV� No Text GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT I GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit TEINERT COMMERCIAL BUILDING SERVICES who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. _. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative WES D. EVERETT FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, -$ supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Offerors, General Instructions to Offerors, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Offeror for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s). WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper -- inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, - should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall -. keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all 18 19. 20. 21. i modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. CHARACTER OF WORKERS 1_ The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be -, uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial - action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; - otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following - methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or w.. Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field ` cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. 6 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self- insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE l ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR A. Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of 50$ 0,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Personal Injury & Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance — NOT REQUIRED C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, 30$ 0,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as a primary additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance — NOT REQUIRED E. Umbrella Liability Insurance — NOT REQUIRED F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental__ entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and -' payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; G (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. 10 (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the proposal specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30-point bold type and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: � 11 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 8001372-7713 or 5121804-4000 (http✓/www twcc.state.tv-us/twcccontacts html) to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage; " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and I (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage ! . showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the r project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 12 (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to offering. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to proposing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in 13 the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising there from. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $25 (TWENTY FIVE) PER CONSECUTIVE CALANDER DAY not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. i 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. 14 The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. OUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, .__ 15 against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. . 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, I if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding 16 i s the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed 17 denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed - that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed proposals, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinaeove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, 18 i In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 19 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 56. NONAPPROPRIATION All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock 20 for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination. 57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS RE: RESOLUTION NO.2002-R0483, NOVEMBER 14, 2002 Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer -9 Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Journey Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Apprentice Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper .__ Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter _ Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates 1 Hourly Rate 11.50 12.00 7.50 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.00 7.00 9.00 11.00 15.00 8.00 10.00 9.00 18.00 10.00 9.50 10.50 10.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 7.50 Concrete Finisher 9.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.50 Electrical Repairer -Equipment 12.50 Flagger 6.50 Form Setter 8.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.50 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 9.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 9.00 Bulldozer 9.00 Concrete Paving Machine 9.00 Front End Loader 9.00 Heavy Equipment Operator 9.00 Light Equipment Operator 8.00 Motor Grader Operator 10.25 Roller 7.00 Scraper 7.50 Tractor -Trailer 8.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 8.00 Truck Driver -Light 7.00 4 2 EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. 3 SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT MANUAL CEMETERY OFFICE FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS H. W�K-1. , c'1 q ri 1, SET NO. ARCHITECTS PC PROJECT NO. 898-07 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS COX DIRKS 1710 15TH STREET DATE: 05/30/2007 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 TEL 806/762-1226 FAX 806/762-1257 TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTE: These documents have been arranged in accordance with the CSI Format for Construction Specifications. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01015 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01021 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01210 ALLOWANCES 01230 ALTERNATES 01300 SUBMITTALS 01505 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02230 SITE CLEARING 02300 EARTHWORK 02361 TERMITE CONTROL DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03301 03451 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CAST STONE 04203 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 - METALS 05310 STEEL DECK 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06305 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06401 ARCHITECTURAL COLUMNS DIVISION I - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 07200 INSULATION 07241 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07410 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08550 WOOD WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 898-07 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS, CONT DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09260 09310 09650 09680 09720 09910 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10440 10520 10801 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES CERAMIC TILE RESILIENT FLOORING CARPETING WALL COVERINGS PAINTING SPECIALTY SIGNS FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 15110 15180 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16110 rl r, 898-07 TABLE OF CONTENTS SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLUMBING HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRICAL PAGE - 2 u SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Project: A New Cemetery Office for the City of Lubbock Project Location: 2011 East 31st Street; Lubbock, Texas Contract Documents, dated May 30, 2007, were prepared for the Project by Cox/Dirks Architects, P.C. Contract Documents: The Contract Documents indicate the types of minimum requirements of procedure and performance of the Work of the Contract and related requirements and conditions that have an impact on the Project. Related requirements and conditions that are indicated on the Contract Documents include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: Special conditions. Existing site conditions and restrictions on use of the site. Work performed prior to work under this Contract. Alterations and coordination with existing work or conditions. Work to be performed concurrently by the Owner(s) subcontractor. Work to be performed concurrently by separate contractors. Work to be performed subsequent to work under this Contract. Alternates. Allowances. Summary by References: Work of the Contract can be summarized by references- to the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections, Drawings, addenda and modifications to the Contract Documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this project manual and including but not necessarily limited to printed material referenced by any of these. It is recognized that work of the Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations, natural __. phenomenon including weather conditions and other forces outside the Contract Documents. Abbreviated Written Summary: Briefly and without force and effect upon the contract documents, the Work of the Contract can be summarized as follows: The Work of this Contract includes coordination of the entire Work of the Project, including preparation of general coordination drawings, diagrams and schedules, and control of site utilization, from beginning of construction activity through project close-out and warranty periods. The work includes poured reinforced concrete foundation and slab -on -grade, conventional wood framing with brick veneer and EIFS wall finish, cast stone columns and trim, cement board and wood trim and laminated asphalt roofing shingles. The Work includes solid core doors, hollow metal frames, hardware, masonry and drywall interior partitions, interior finishes and cabinetry. The Work includes standard plumbing, heating -ventilating -air conditioning, electrical, lighting, communications and signal systems. 898-07 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK, CONT WORK BY THE OWNER Separate Work: The Owner will be responsible for performance of certain construction operations at the Site. Those operations scheduled to be substantially completed before work under this Contract begins includes the following: Selective demolition of the yard sprinkler system within the limits of the building. Separate Work: The Owner will be responsible for performance of certain construction operations at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract includes the following: Additional hot mix paving. Reworking of the yard irrigation system around the new construction. Landscaping around the new construction. Fencing at the alley property line(s). CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. Keep streets, easements, driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site or adjoining Owner's properties. Inform and coordinate Work with Owner to minimize disruption of existing operations. Lock automotive type vehicles, such as passenger cars and trucks and other mechanized or motorized construction equipment, when parked and unattended, so as to prevent unauthorized use. Do not leave such vehicles or equipment unattended with the motor running or the ignition key in place. OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing buildings during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Owner or his representative during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations or safety of the public. BUILDING TYPE General: The building has been designed and Contract Documents prepared with the intention that the resulting Work will comply with the [1997 Uniform] [2000 International] Building Code. Occupancy Group: B Building Type: VB The Contractor and subcontractors shall adhere to all code regulations of the 2003 International Building Code and local or amended code requirements of local building authorities to insure that the overall work performance is in compliance with all requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) e9a-07 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 i SECTION 01015 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK The types of minimum requirements for procedural and performance of work include but are not necessarily limited to the following categories: Permits Bonds are required. Insurance Requirements Taxes Addenda to Contract Documents The Contractor shall secure and pay for all building permits, fees, licenses, and taxes as required in connection with the work of this Contract. The shall conform to all state, county and municipal code and ordinance requirements pertaining to health, life safety and building construction, curb cuts, sidewalks, curb and gutters, approaches, barricades, and construction protection. BONDS AND INSURANCE The Contractor shall meet all insurance and bond requirements as called for by the City of Lubbock in other sections of the Bid Documents. TAXES This project is being built by an Organization which qualifies for tax exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. No sales tax is to be included in the proposal. The Owner will furnish the Contractor certificates of exemption upon award of the Contract. The contractor is responsible for obtaining the proper permits which enables him to buy the materials without paying taxes. INTERPRETATION BY ADDENDA If any bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning of any parts of plans, specifications, bidding phase (conflicts or items to be included in bid) sequencing or other proposed contract documents, he may submit to the Architect a written request for an interpretation thereof not later than five(5) days before bidding date. Any interpretation of proposed documents will be made only by addendum duly issued and a copy of such addendum will be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of such documents within four(4) days prior to the bidding date. The Owner will not be responsible for any other explanation or interpretation of the proposed documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 898-07 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01015 - 1 SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with Contractor's Construction Schedule. SCHEDULE OF VALUES Coordination: Contractor shall coordinate preparation of its Schedule of Values for its part of the Work with preparation of the Contractors' Construction Schedule. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: Contractor's construction schedule. Application for Payment form including Continuation Sheets. List of subcontractors. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than seven (7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment. Format and Content: Use the CSI Division Format as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: Project name and location. Name of the Architect. Project number. Contractor's name and address. Date of submittal. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: Generic name. Related Specification Section. Name of subcontractor. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. Name of supplier. Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value. Dollar value. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. For each part of the Work where an Application for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored but not yet installed, provide separate ;J line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value for that part of the E 898-07 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 1 a APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT, CONT Work. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to the extent that such items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the tenth day of each month. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is to be a month with the period ending the last day of the month and starting the first day of each month. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for Application for Payment. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. Transmittal: Submit three (3) executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With the final Application for Payment, submit final or full waivers of mechanics lien from every entity, subcontractor and supplier who may lawfully be entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract, and related to the Work covered by the payment. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms and executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: List of principal suppliers and fabricators. Schedule of Values. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). List of Contractor's staff assignments. Copies of building permits. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Performance and payment bonds (if required). 898-07 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 2 44 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT, CONT y:f Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: Occupancy permits and similar approvals from local and state agencies. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. Test/adjust/balance records. Maintenance instructions. Change -over information related to Owner's occupancy, operation and maintenance Final cleaning. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect=s Certificate of Substantial Completion. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following: Completion of Project closeout requirements. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. Removal of temporary facilities and services. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. Change of door locks to owner's access. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 898-07 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027 - 3 SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing, handling and processing allowances. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. Types of allowances scheduled herein include the following: Lump -sum allowances. Unit -cost allowances. SELECTION AND PURCHASE At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed in order to avoid delaying the Work. At Architect request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. SUBMITTALS Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Change Order Data: Include in each change order proposal both the quantities of products being purchased and unit costs, along with total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey -of -requirements data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, and amounts of applicable trade discounts. Change Order Mark -Up: The amount of each change order resulting from final selection of products and systems covered by an allowance shall be the difference between purchase order amount and allowance, and shall not include Contractor's mark-up (or subcontractor's mark-up) except to the extent clearly demonstrated (by Contractor) that either scope of installation or nature of work required was changed from that which could have been foreseen from description of allowance and other information in contract documents. Unused portions of the allowances will be credited to the Owner at job completion by means of change order. LUMP SUM ALLOWANCE Items shall be supplied to the Contractor by such persons or entities that the Owner may choose. The Contractor shall pay for such items including required taxes and the difference in the actual cost and the allowance shall be shown on a Change Order. The Contract amount will be adjusted accordingly. Where installation labor is included in the lump sum allowance, the Owner may choose the installer and the Contractor shall coordinate the installation with all other affected trades. 898-07 ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1 SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES, CONT UNIT -COST ALLOWANCE Each change order amount for unit -cost type allowance shall be based solely on the difference between the actual unit purchase amount and the unit allowance, multiplied by the final measure or count of work -in -place, with reasonable allowances, where applicable, for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections and similar margins. Include installation costs in the purchase amount only where indicated as a part of the allowance. When requested, prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate the margins as claimed. Prepare and submit substantiation of a change in the scope of work (if any) claimed in the change orders related to unit -cost type allowances. The Owner reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work -in -place by an independent quantity survey, measure or count. UNUSED MATERIALS The Contractor shall conform to requirements for extra stock or materials to be left and stored on the job site for Owner's future use as noted in the various specification sections. These materials shall be available for inspection and placed in Owner's secure space at the time of Substantial Completion. Prepare unused material for the Owner's storage, and deliver to the Owner's storage space as directed. Disposal of unusable material is the Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION I.J•I.\.:fi\i�4J� lii Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. After allowance materials have arrived and been accepted on the job site, the Contractor is responsible for all damage and quantities. The Contractor shall bear all cost for replacement of missing, damaged or shortages in allowance materials. Provide security for allowance material off' the job. PREPARATION Contractor is responsible so it does not 'walk Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related construction activities. SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES Allowance No.l: Allow a unit cost of $24.00 per square yard for purchase of carpet only. Contractor is to include miscellaneous materials and installation of the carpet in the Base Bid. The Owner reserves the right to purchase all materials and labor from vendors of his choice. Allowance No.2: Allow a unit cost of $520.00 per thousand for purchase of face brick material only delivered on job site. Allowance No.3: Allow a unit cost for vinyl wall fabric material only as stated below. Submit itemized areas for each type. All labor, freight and miscellaneous material for installation to be included in base bid. Type I: Allow $1.50 per square foot 898-07 ALLOWANCES 01210 - 2 SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES, CONT Allowance No.4: Allow a unit cost of $7.50 for ceramic floor and wall tile material only. Contractor to include labor and miscellaneous materials in the Base bid. 01210 - 3 SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. DEFINITIONS Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. PROCEDURES Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. Notification: Immediately following award of Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this section. Specification Sections contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, appurtenances and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES Alternate No. 1: Omit asphalt roof shingles and underlayment. Install MBCI #HB12 24ga. Kynar 500 finish roof panels, accessories and trim over `Metal Mate' underlayment on plywood deck. 898-07 ALTERNATES 01230 - 1 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including: Shop Drawings. Product Data. Samples. Mock-ups. Inspection and test reports. Administration Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: Permits. Applications for payment. Performance and payment bonds. Insurance certificates. List of Subcontractors with addresses, contact person and phone numbers. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" specifies requirements for submittal of the Schedule of Values. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to function as intended. Field Samples are physical examples erected on -site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. Mockups are assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 898-07 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 SUBMITTALS, CONT The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 sections for additional general requirements applicable to shop drawings, product data, and samples for mechanical and electrical work, respectively. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. Provide a space on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. Project name. Date. Name and address of Architect. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Submittals received without Contractor's executed review and approval markings, or submittals received from sources other than through the Contractor's office will be returned by the Architect "without action". Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirement. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G 810 or Contractor's standard form if approved by the Architect. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. Include the following information: Dimensions. Identification of products and materials included. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Submittal: Submit five blue- or black -line prints; submit extra prints where required for maintenance manuals and engineers' records. Two prints will be 898-07 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2 - SUBMITTALS, CONT retained unless engineer review is required in which case three prints will be retained; the remainder will be returned. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that shows the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended. Preparation of coordination Drawings is specified in Section "Project Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. PP(1T1 rT nATA Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings". Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: Manufacturer's printed recommendations. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. Notation of coordination requirements. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed by the Contractor. Printed color charts are not acceptable for selection of colors. Provide actual color samples, chips or charts that indicate actual installed colors where color selection is required. Submittals: Submit five (S) copies of each required submittal; submit extra copies where required for engineer review and/or maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain two, and will return the others marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to Installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installer's possession. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. SAMPLES Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. rv" Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the following: 898-07 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 SUBMITTALS, CONT Generic description of the Sample. Sample source. Product name or name of manufacturer. Compliance with recognized standards. Availability and delivery time. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. Submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product. Submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. Mock-ups: Mock-ups and similar samples specified in individual work sections are recognized as a special type of sample. Comply with requirements for "samples" to greatest extent possible, and process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity. ITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS Submit quality -control and test submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer "s field reports, and other quality -control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control." Closeout Submittals: Refer to individual work sections and to "closeout" sections for specific requirements on submittal of closeout information, materials, tools and similar items. Record Document Copies: Furnish two (2) sets. Maintenance/Operating Manuals: Furnish two bound copies. ARCHITECT'S ACTION Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. Review of submittals is for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions 898-07 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 4 SUBMITTALS. CONT for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self- explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken: Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Approved", that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. Final -But -Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Approved as Noted", that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit", do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. Do not permit submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Action Not Required". 898-07 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 5 SECTION 01505 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS Definitions: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication by Architect that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but not by way of limitation, utility services, construction facilities, support facilities, and security/protection provisions. QUALITY ASSURANCE General In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules/recommendations of franchised utility companies, comply' with specific requirements indicated and with applicable local industry standards for construction work. NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA Code 241 (Building Construction and Demolition Operations). Conservation: In compliance with Owner's policies on energy/materials conservation, install and operate temporary facilities and perform demolition activities in a manner which will conserve reasonably and avoid waste of energy and materials. JOB CONDITIONS General: Initiate use of each existing facility at time first reasonably required for proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove existing facilities as new permanent facilities are put into service. Conditions of Use: Operate, maintain and protect existing facilities in a manner and at locations which will be safe, non -hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects. PARTS 2 & 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUT TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Potable Water: Utilize existing hose bibbs. Temporary Power: Provide waterproof temporary service, power panels and circuits. Service should be with ground fault circuit interrupter features, activated from each circuit of 20 amp or less rating. Metering: Install and maintain new meters for water and electrical power service at earliest possible date. A11 service prior to owner occupancy to be provided without charge to owner by contractor. The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, water distribution, drainage, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation, electrical power distribution, lighting, ladders, and roads. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately. Water Distribution: Utilize existing hose bibbs or Provide temporary hose bibbs and hose of lengths sufficient to reach entire area of earth work. Prevent freezing of water distribution by either prompt drainage after each use or by suitable protection. _. 898-07 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, CONT Closures: Provide temporary closure walls where indicated and where reasonably required to insure adequate workmanship and protection from weather and unsatisfactory ambient conditions for the work. Electrical Power: Utilize power distribution system, sufficient to accommodate construction operations requiring power tools, lighting and start up testing of permanent electric power equipment. Provide overload protection. If temporary outlets are necessary, provide (not less than 4 gang) power to construction area so that power tools on a single extension cord will not extend beyond 100 feet maximum length. Supply power for electric welding, if any, from either temporary power distribution system or by engine -driven power -generator sets, at Contractor's option. Lighting: Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship everywhere. Provide general lighting with local switching which will enable energy conservation during periods of varying activity (work -in -progress traffic only, security check, lock -up, etc.) Provide uniformly spaced general lighting equivalent to not less than one 200-watt incandescent lamp per 50 sq. ft. Access Provisions: Maintain temporary access elements as reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during demolition. Comply with reasonable requests of governing authorities performing inspections. Cover finished surfaces with sufficient protection to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration until time of substantial completion. SECURITY/PROTECTION PROVISIONS The types of temporary security and protection provisions required include, but not by way of limitation, fire protection, barricades, warning signals/lights, closure fences, storage trailers, building enclosure/lockup and similar provisions intended to minimize property loss, personal injury and claims for damages at project site. Fire Extinguishers: Provide types, sizes, numbers and locations as would be reasonably effective in extinguishing fires during construction, by personnel at project site. Building Enclosure and Lockup: Secure building against unauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary enclosures at ground floor and other locations of possible entry with locked entrances. TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, sanitary facilities, drinking water, first aid facilities, telephones, clean-up facilities, waste disposal service, rodent/pest control and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of personnel at the site including Owner's and Architects personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, when authorized by the Architect or immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with demolition activities. Sanitary Facilities: Utilize existing self-contained toilet units of type acceptable to governing authorities, adequate (at all stages of work) for use of personnel at project site. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel when both sexes are working at project site. Maintain facilities in sanitary condition. Field office: Provide temporary field office of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel with proper lighting and heating facilities. 898-07 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 - 2 SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. Related Sections include the following: Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire - rated construction. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. DEFINITIONS Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. SUBMITTALS Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. QUALITY ASSURANCE Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. Foundation construction. Bearing walls. 898-07 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1 ING AND PATCHING, CONT Structural concrete. Structural steel. Lintels. Timber and primary wood framing. Structural decking. Miscellaneous structural metals. Structural systems of special construction in Division-13. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Primary operational systems and equipment. Air or smoke barriers. Fire -protection systems. Control systems. Communication systems. Electrical wiring systems. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. Membranes and flashings. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced installer, fabricator, and specialized firm. Concrete. Masonry Stonework and stone masonry. Ornamental metal. Roofing. Firestopping. Exterior Insulation Finish System. Tile Flooring. Carpeting. Wall covering. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. WARRANTY Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. 898-07 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING, CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 898-07 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 CUTTING AND PATCHING, CONT Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. Floor or roof deck is to be neatly sawed where any penetration occurs. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to t-.. demonstrate integrity of installation. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. 898-07 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 4 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. a lu{1C77 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: Inspection procedures. Project Record Documents. Operation and maintenance manuals. Warranties. Instruction of Owner's personnel. Final cleaning. Related Sections include the following: Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Complete startup testing of systems. Submit test/adjust/balance records. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with construction tools, and similar elements. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 896-07 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, CONT Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis Completion. FINAL COMPLETION identified in previous of requirements for Final Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST Preparation: Submit three (3) copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Include the following information at the top of each page: Project name. Date. Name of Architect. Name of Contractor. Page number. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. 898-07 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, CONT Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings, where applicable. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: Operation Data: Emergency instructions and procedures. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. Description of controls and sequence of operations. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. Maintenance procedures. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. Copies of maintenance service agreements. Copies of warranties and bonds. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. WARRANTIES Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. 898-07 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, CONT Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven (7) days' advance notice. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. FINAL CLEANING General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even - textured surface. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid 898-07 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, CONT disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove labels that are not permanent. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. 898-07 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 5 SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass to remain. Removing existing groundcovers and grass. Stripping topsoil. Removing above- and below -grade site foundations and improvements. Removing curbs and approaches and sidewalks as shown or required. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. Related Sections include the following: Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. DEFINITIONS Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. Topsoil containing nutgrass or other objectionable growth shall be removed and replace by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. MATERIAL OWNERSHIP Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain on Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. PROJECT CONDITIONS Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site -clearing operations. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. 898-07 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1 SITE CLEARING, CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOIL MATERIALS Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Obtain approved borrow soil materials off -site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on -site. PART 3 - EXECUTION Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to a sediment and erosion control plan, specific to the site that complies with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. TREE PROTECTION Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow -tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil., Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 898-07 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 2 SITE CLEARING, CONT Backfill with soil as soon as possible. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. UTILITIES Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Excavate for and remove underground utilities interfering with new construction or as indicated to be removed. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 15 mechanical or Division 16 electrical. CLEARING AND GRUBBING Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. Remove foundations, grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 6 inches, and compact each layer to a 959 density. SOIL STRIPPING Remove sad and grass before stripping topsoil. Stripped topsoil containing nutgrass or other objectionable growth shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at his own expense. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered (but not less than 9") in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. Remove heavy growth of grass from areas before stripping. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. 898-07 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 3 SITE CLEARING, CONT Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil. SITE IMPROVEMENTS Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. Remove slabs, curbs, gutters, and other impairments as indicated. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be shown on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of Related Division 15 and 16 Sections. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is included under this section. DISPOSAL Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on -owner's property. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 898-07 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 4 SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements. Fill course for support of building slabs is included as part of this work. Excavating and backfilling of trenches within building lines. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances. Excavating and Backfilling for Mechanical/Electrical Work: Provisions of this section shall apply to Divisions 15 and 16 sections for excavation and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances. Final Gradinq, together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting, is specified in Division 2 Section, "Landscape Work." nV VTMTTTnX1O Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense Under footings, foundations bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect, who will make an inspection of conditions. If Architect determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in work. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. SUBMITTALS Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copy to Contractor: Test reports or borrow material. Verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material, in accordance with specified requirements. Field reports; in -place soil density tests. 898-07 EARTHWORK 02300 - 1 EARTHWORK, CONT One optimum moisture -maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each strata tested. QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Testing and Inspection Service: Contractor shall employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing laboratory approved by the Architect to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the geotechnical testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct required field and laboratory geo-technical testing without delaying the progress of the Work. PROJECT CONDITIONS Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design and are available to the Contractor for information only. Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusion drawn from this data by Contractor. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by Contractor, at the Contractor' option; however, no change in the Contract Sum will be authorized for such additional exploration. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and Utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to Architect, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are active. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Perform excavation by hand within dripline of large trees to remain. Protect root systems from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap. PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOIL MATERIALS Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) M 145 soil classification groups__ A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3. 898-07. EARTHWORK 02300 - 2 i {i k EARTHWORK, CONT Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined in AASHTO M 145 soil classification groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7; also peat and other highly organic soils. Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed caliche, meeting Texas Highway Specifications Item 232, type "3", grade 2, with plasticity index not to exceed 15. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter with plasticity index not to exceed 12. Sandfill: Clean blow sand with no organic materials or clay clods. PART 3 - EXECUTION STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain side supports and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. DEWATERING Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate or stand in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as back fill or fill. EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and other construction and for inspection. Excavations for footings and foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 898-07 EARTHWORK 02300 - 3 EARTHWORK, CONT TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and backfill with a 6-inch layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand -excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve pipe bell of loads ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on bearing surface. Trenches excavated below proper grades are to be backfilled and compacted to required grades with pea gravel. BACKFILL AND FILL General: Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this section. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. Under pavements, use caliche base material to required depth. Under steps, use satisfactory fill material. Under building slabs, use approved compacted fill material. Under piping and conduit and equipment, use pea gravel materials where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. Shape excavation bottom to fit bottom 90 degrees of cylinder. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. Provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 2'-6" below surface of roadways. After installation and testing of piping or conduit, provide minimum 4-inch-thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete prior to backfilling or placement of roadway subbase. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities have been performed and recorded. Removal of concrete formwork. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break-up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. 898-07 EARTHWORK 02300 - 4 _, EARTHWORK, CONT -, Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift. Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557 (cohesive soils); and not less than the following percentages of relative density in accordance with ASTM D 2049 (cohesionless soils): Under structures, building slabs and steps, and pavements, compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at: 95 percent maximum density. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at: 85 percent maximum density. Under walkways, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at: 95 percent relative maximum density. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material. Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. GRADING General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades. - Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows: Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 _r foot above or below required subgrade elevations. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with - finish surface not more than 0.05 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below required subgrade elevation. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area of classification. 898-07 EARTHWORK 02300 - 5 EARTHWORK, CONT PAVEMENT BASE COURSE General: Base course consists of placing base material, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support asphalt pavement course. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross -slope of base course. Provide blue tops at maximum of 50 feet on center for control of base course. Placing: Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting base material during placement operations. When a compacted base course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more that 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. LDING SLAB LEVELING COURSE General: Leveling course consists of placement of compacted fill material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs. Placing: Place fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. When a compacted course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. Level top of fill course with blue tops at a maximum of 25 feet on center. Hand tamp corners or locations where equipment cannot reach. No loose fill or uncompacted soil will be allowed under slabs. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), as applicable. Field density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 2922, providing that calibration curves are periodically check and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. In conjunction with each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages in accordance with ASTM D 3017. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to Architect. Paved Areas and Building Slab subgrade: Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests. 898-07 EARTHWORK 02300 - 6 EARTHWORK, CONT MAINTENANCE Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add back fill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash, and debris, and dispose of it off owner's property. Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris, and waste materials and dispose of it off Owner' property. 898-07 EARTHWORK 02300 - 7 SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Soil treatment with termiticide. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For termiticide. Include the EPA -Registered Label for termiticide products. Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product manufacturer. Qualification Data: For Installer of termite control products. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following: Date and time of application. Moisture content of soil before application. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. Areas of application. Water source for application. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA - Registered Label. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from a single manufacturer for each product. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" to schedule application of termiticide products. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA -Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. TERMITE CONTROL, CONT COORDINATION Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground -supported slabs before construction. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Termiticides: Bayer Corporation; Premise 75. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Dursban TC. Syngenta; ProBuild TC. SOIL TREATMENT Termiticide: Provide an EPA -registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA -Registered Label. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and 898-07 TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 2 } TERMITE CONTROL, CONT footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. APPLICATION, GENERAL General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label for products. APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT Application: Mix soil, treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA - Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. Slabs -on -Grade: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. Post warning signs in areas of application. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 898-07 TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 3 SECTION 03301 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY -' This Section specifies cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes for foundation, footings and _.j slabs not exposed to freezing or traffic loads. Related Sections include the following: Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301. Reporting: Report all test results in writing within 24 hours of the test to the Architect and Contractor. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. -e Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Indicate amounts of water to be withheld for later addition at the Project Site. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from.the same manufacturer. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and protection of in -place concrete. Formwork and form accessories. Steel reinforcement and supports. Concrete mixtures. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FORMWORK Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301. STEEL REINFORCEMENT Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric flat sheets. 898-07 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into 03301 - 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE, CONT CONCRETE MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1-1/2 inch nominal size for footings beams and walls. 1-inch aggregate at all slabs and other applications. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1 1/2 inches long. Monofilament Fibers: Fiberstand 100; Euclid Chemical Co. Fibermix Stealth; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries. ADMIXTURES General: Admixture certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. Air -Entraining Admixture at Exterior Concrete: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: "Air-Tite", Cormix. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair", W.R. Grace. "MB-VR" or "Micro -Air", Master Builders, Inc. "Sealtight AEA", W.R. Meadows, Inc. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. RELATED MATERIALS Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C or better with maximum water vapor permeance of 0.04 perms when tested with ASTM E 96. Not less than 10 mils thick. Stego Wrap Vapor Retarder Fiffolyn T-85 Rufco 016WB Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated celulosic fiber. CURING MATERIALS Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Water: Potable. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. CONCRETE MIXES Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. Reference "Cement Concrete Pavement" for separate requirements. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: Compressive Strength (28 days): 3000 psi. Slump: 4 inches. Slump Limit for Concrete Containina Hiah-Rance Water-Reducina Admixture: Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to plant- or site -verified, 2- to 3- 898-07 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE, CONT inch slump. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer=s prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 4.5 percent within a tolerance of plus 1.0 or minus 1.5 percent. Air content of trowel -finished interior concrete floors shall not exceed 3.0 percent. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. CONCRETE MIXING Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION Design, construct erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. VAPOR RETARDER Install, protect, and repair vapor -retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. STEEL REINFORCEMENT Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. Lap all splices 20 diameters but never less than 12 inches. JOINTS General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of concrete, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. Isolation and Expansion Joints: Install joint -filler strips at junctions with slabs -on - grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. 898-07 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE, CONT Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. FINISHING FORMED SURFACES Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner and a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Completely remove fins and other projections. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth -formed finish. Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth -formed finished concrete. Smooth -rubbed finish. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finish, unless otherwise indicated. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -film finish coating system. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin -set methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. TOLERANCES Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection, and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. 898-07 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE, CONT Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer=s written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by moisture curing, moisture -retaining -cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: Continuous water -fog spray. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. Perform tests according to ACI 301. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at paint of placement for each compressive -strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive - strength specimens. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of three standard cylinders for each compressive -strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory -cured test specimens unless field -cured test specimens are required. Compression -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each addition 50 cu. yd. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and one specimen at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd, plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. REPAIRS Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. 898-07 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 5 SECTION 03451 - CAST STONE PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of cast stone is shown on drawings and in schedules. Cast stone includes the plain smooth -faced quoin and stretcher units. Caulking, sealants, and gaskets are specified in Division 7. Columns are specified in Section 6. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Firms which have a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of cast stone units, similar to units required for this project. Fabricator must have sufficient production capacity to produce, transport, and deliver required units without causing delay in the work. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, data and instructions for manufactured materials and products. Include manufacturer's certifications and laboratory test reports as required. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing complete information for fabrication and installation of cast stone units. Indicate member dimensions and cross-section; location, size and type of reinforcement, including special reinforcement and lighting devices necessary for handling and erection. Samples: Submit three (3) sets of precast samples approximately 12"xl2"x2" to illustrate quality, color and texture of surface finish. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver cast stone units to project site in such quantities and at such times to assure continuity of installation. Store units at project site to prevent cracking, distortion, warping, staining, or other physical damage and so that markings are visible. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points as shown on final shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Drawings are based on: Cast Stone Quoin Concrete Designs, Inc. #QU3 Cast Stone Stretcher Concrete Designs, Inc. #M205-10DS31.6 - modified to 18" width. FORMWORK Provide forms and, where required, form facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or other acceptable material that is non -reactive with concrete and will produce required r< finish surfaces. 898-07 CAST STONE 03451 - 1 CAST STONE, CONT Accurately construct forms, mortar -tight, and of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete placing operations, temperature changes and, when prestressed pretensioning and detensioning operations. Maintain frame work to provide completed precast concrete units of shapes, lines and dimensions indicated, within specified fabrication tolerances. CONCRETE MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. Use only aggregate and one brand and type of cement throughout the project. Use "white" portland cement for facing concrete mix to match Architect's control sample. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33; masonry sand free of staining or deleterious materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. Water: Potable or free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and embedded in steel. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride in cast stone. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each type of concrete required. Design mixes may be prepared by an independent testing facility or by qualified precast manufacturing plant personnel, at precast manufacturer's option. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum at 28 days. Absorption: Not to exceed 6% in accordance with ASTM C 642. Adjustment to Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using the work. FABRICATION General: Fabricate cast stone units by the dry tamp process complying with manufacturing, quality control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances to produce units which are straight, smooth, and true to size and shape, with exposed edges and corners precise and square unless otherwise indicated. Surface Finish: finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION Fabricate cast stone units to provide a fine smooth sand surface Install cast stone members plumb, level with 1/4" joints using mortar as specified in Section 04200. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and alignment as members are being permanently connected. Cleaning: Clean exposed facings to remove dirt and stains which may be on units after erection and completion of joint treatments. Wash and rinse in accordance with precast manufacturer's recommendations. Protect other work from damage due to cleaning operations. Do not use cleaning materials or processes which could change the character of exposed concrete finishes. 898-07 CAST STONE 03451 - 2 SECTION 04203 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and schedule. Types of masonry work required include: Concrete unit masonry Brick masonry QUALITY ASSURANCE Field Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall panels to further verify selections made for color and textural characteristics, under sample submittals of masonry units and mortar, and to represent completed masonry work for qualities of appearance, materials and construction; build mock-up to comply with the following requirements: Locate mock-ups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, as direct by Architect. Build mock-ups for the following types of masonry in sizes of approximately 4' or 6' long by 2' or 4' high. Typical exterior face brick wall. Columns with adjoining EIFS panel. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work. When directed, demolish mock-ups and remove from site. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data fro each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature change, contaminants, corrosion or other causes. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. Store masonry accessories including metal. items to prevent deterioration by corrosion and accumulation of dirt. PROJECT CONDITIONS Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. UNIT MASONRY, CONT Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen. Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing conditions. Perform the following construction procedures while the work is progressing: When air temperature is from 40 deg. F and below, no work is to be performed. ALLOWANCES Furnish face brick under allowances specified in Division-1 Section "Allowances". PART 2 - PRODUCTS MASONRY UNITS - GENERAL Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. BRICK Size: Unless otherwise indicated, provide bricks manufactured to the following actual dimensions: Standard Modular: 2-1/2" x 3-5/8" x 7-5/8". Salvage and new as required to complete masonry work. Coring: Provide solid brick, or cored for vertical brickwork. Do not use cored brick with net cross -sectional area less than 75% of gross area in the same plane or with core holes closer than 3/4' from any edge. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, and as follows. Grade MW except Grade SW where indicated by ASTM C 216 grade requirements for applicable weathering index and exposure. Type FBS (normal size and color variations). CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. Hollow Load -Bearing: ASTM C 90 where shown. Grade N for general use in exterior walls above and below grade that may or may not be exposed to moisture penetration or weather. 898-07 UNIT MASONRY 04203 - 2 UNIT MASONRY, CONT Weight Classification: Normal weight units. (125 lbs. Per cu. Ft. or more, oven dry weight of concrete) at the following location. Exterior and below grade walls Cure units by autoclave treatment as a minimum temperature of 350 deg. F and a minimum pressure of 125 psi. Limit moisture absorption of 25% of saturation during delivery and until time of installation. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce the required mortar color. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. (Lone Star Standard) Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. Colored Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: "SGS Mortar Colors": Davis Colors, A subsidiary of Rockwood Industries, Inc. Water: Clean, free of deleterious materials which would impair strength or bond. MASONRY ACCESSORIES Horizontal Joint Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry: Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10' with matching corner and tee units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, (ASTM A 64 for zinc coating) with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross -rods, and a unit width of 1-1/2" to 2" less than thickness of wall or partition. Provide units fabricated as follows: Ladder type fabricated with single pair of 9 ga. Side rods and 9 ga. Perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. Hot -dip galvanize for fabrication with 1.5 oz. Zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class B2. Anchors and Ties: Provide straps, bars, bolts and rods fabricated from not less than 16 ga. Sheet metal or 3/8" diameter rod stock, unless otherwise indicated. Flexible Anchors: Where masonry is indicated to be anchored to structural framework with flexible anchors, provide 2-piece anchors which will permit horizontal and vertical movement of masonry but will provide lateral restraint. Heckman 132 with 122 anchor At Contractor's option, provide 16-gage hot -dipped galvanized (G-90) ties attached with two screws to the stud at specified spacing. 898-07 UNIT MASONRY 04203 - 3 UNIT MASONRY, CONT For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with hot -dip galvanized coating, ASTM A 153, Class B-2. FLASHING FOR MASONRY Provide concealed flashing, shown to be built into masonry. Laminated Flashing: At fully concealed flashing provide manufacturer's standard laminated flashing of type indicated. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashing: AS specified in Division-u section "Flashing and Sheet Metal". Adhesive for Flashing: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. Products: Provide one of the following vinyl sheet flashing: "Vi-Seal Plastic Flashing"; Afco Products Inc. "BFG" Vinyl Water Barrier; B.F. Goodrich Co. "Nuflex"; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. "Wascoseal"; York Manufacturing, Inc. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grad 40 of the sizes shown. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: Provide 16 oz. Cold -rolled copper (ASTM B 370) formed to the shape shown. Non -Metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Provide premolded, compressible, elastic fillers of foam rubber, neoprene, or extruded plastic. Weepholes: Provide 1/4" round x 4" long medium density polyethylene plastic tubes with cotton cord sash of length required to produce 2" exposure on exterior and 18" in cavity or air space. MASONRY CLEANERS Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength general purpose cleaner designed for new masonry surfaces of type indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. "Sure Klean" No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc. INSULATION Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, closed -cell, extruded polystyrene insulation board with integral high -density skin; complying with FS HH-I-524, Type IV, min. 20 psi compressive strength; k-value of 0.20 at 75 F mean temp.; 0.3% max. Water absorption; 1.1 perm -inch max. Water vapor transmission; manufacturer's standard lengths and widths. Dow Chemical Co. "Styrofoam SM or SB" at contractor's option. 1" minimum thickness perimeter insulation. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti -freeze agents such as Calcium Chloride in mortar or grout. 898-07 UNIT MASONRY 04203 - 4 UNIT MASONRY. CONT Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specifications, except limit materials to those specified herein, and limit cement/lime ratio (by volume) as follow: Type S: 1P:1/2L:4-1/2S (Below grade) Type N: 1P:1L:6S (Above grade) Masonry Cement: Over 2-1/4 parts up to three parts damp loose aggregate per one part of masonry cement. No lime allowed. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION, GENERAL Wetting Clay Brick: Wet brick made from clay or shale which have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 30 sq. In. Per minute. Use wetting methods which ensure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Do not wet concrete masonry units. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. Build chases as shown or required for the work of other trades. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to the opening. Cut masonry units using motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. For masonry which is specified to be wetted, comply with the ~' Brick Institute of America recommendations. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost of freezing. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20' nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, not 1/2" in 40' or more. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/211. Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8". 898-07 UNIT MASONRY 04203 - 5 UNIT MASONRY, CONT LAYING MASONRY WALLS Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. Built -In Work: As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. Where built-in items are to embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. Fill CMU cores with grout three courses (24") under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated. Form anchors of stainless steel not less than 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 210" long with ends turned up not less than 2' or with cross -pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar filled cores. MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Use Type N mortar for exterior above grade loadbearing and non -loading walls, parapet walls, interior loadbearing walls and non-loadbearing partitions. Use Type S at exterior below grade applications. Batch Control: Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not be permitted. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use water clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2-« hr. Period as required to restore workability. Lay brick and other solid masonry units with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs in mortar in starting course of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout. For starting courses on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by 898-07 UNIT MASONRY 04203 - 6 UNIT MASONRY, CONT other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and c" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, as otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. Reinforce masonry openings greater than l'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in two horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above lintel and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. ANCHORING MASONRY WORK General: Provide anchor devices of type indicated. Anchor single wythe masonry veneer to studs with masonry or corrugated veneer anchors to comply with following requirements: Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to studs with two metal fasteners of type indicated. Embed tie section in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1" air space between back of masonry veneer wythe and face of sheathing. Locate anchor section relative to course in which tie section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down. Space anchors as indicated but not more than 16" o.c. vertically and 16" o.c. horizontally. Install additional anchors with 1'-0" of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 3'-0". CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build -in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses. See Division 7 sections for "Joint Sealers." Build Flanges of copper or metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" in direction of flow. Seal joints below grad and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 30'-0" on center. LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0" are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or 898-07 UNIT MASONRY 04203 - 7 UNIT MASONRY, CONT formed -in -place masonry lintels. Thoroughly cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed -in -place lintels. Provide masonry lintels and bond beam at top of wall as indicated. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed "u"-shaped lintel units with reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with Type M mortar or concrete grout. Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of 4" for openings less than 6'-0" wide and 8" for wider openings. FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK General: Provide concealed flashings in masonry work at, or above, all shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divert such water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. Extend flashings the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry at each end. Extend flashing from aline «" in from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 6". Provide weepholes in the head joints of the same course of masonry bedded in the flashing mortar. Interlock end joints of flashings by overlapping deformations not less than 1-1/2" and seal lap with elastic sealant. Install flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING Removing and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, due to selective demolition or remodeling or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weepholes, and completely filled with mortar. Point -up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepare for application of caulking or sealant compounds. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry to manufacturer's recommendations: Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic crape hoes or chisels. Protect adjacent masonry or stone and non -masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" to clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner indicated below. Acidic cleaner; apply in compliance with directions of cleaner manufacturer. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "Tek" bulletins. 898-07 UNIT MASONRY 04203 - 8 I UNIT MASONRY, CONT Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. 04203 - 9 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Floor Deck. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." FMG Listing: Provide steel deck evaluated by FMG and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Drawings are based on the following: Floor Deck Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Steel Deck: ASC Profiles, Inc. Consolidated Systems, Inc. Epic Metals Corporation. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. United Steel Deck, Inc. Verco Manufacturing Co. 898-07 . STEEL DECK 05310 - 1 STEEL DECK, CONT FLOOR DECK Steel Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 80, G90 zinc coating. Deck Profile: Type B, wide rib. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0474 inch (18ga). Span Condition: Simple span. Side Laps: Overlapped. ACCESSORIES General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (16ga) thick, with factory -punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. PART 3 - EXECUTION Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. 898-07 STEEL DECK 05310 - 2 C- .v STEEL DECK, CONT Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. FLOOR -DECK INSTALLATION Fasten floor -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Floor -Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight -fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field welds will be subject to inspection. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. REPAIRS AND PROTECTION Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. - 898-07 STEEL DECK 05310 - 3 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere. Types of work in this section include metal fabrications for: Loose steel lintels. Anchor bolts. Structural steel is specified in another section within Division 5. RELATED SECTIONS Division 5 Section "Steel Deck". PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36 Structural Steel Sheet: Hot -rolled, ASTM A 570; or cold -rolled ASTM A 611, Class 1; of grade required for design loading. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A 153. Grout: Non -Shrink Non -Metallic Grout: Pre -mixed, factory -packaged, non -staining, non- corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. Fasteners: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS Ff-S-111. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 898-07 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS, CONT Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. Metal Primer Paint: Red lead mixed pigment, alkyd varnish, linseed oil paint, FS TT- P-86, Type II; or red lead iron oxide, raw linseed oil, alkyd paint, Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint 2-64; or basic lead silicon chromate base iron oxide, linseed oil, alkyd paint, FS TT-P-615, Type II. Primer selected must be compatible with finish coats of paint. Coordinate selection of metal primer with finish paint requirements specified in Division 9. FABRICATION, GENERAL Workmanshi Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finish product for use intended. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for components of work. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Provide for anchorage to type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items. Shop Painting: Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning". Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning". Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. 898-07 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 ( METAL FABRICATIONS, CONT Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply two coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS Loose Steel Lintels: Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Provide not less than 8" bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. PART 3 - EXECUTION DDT"n T n7mTnh7 Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. INSTALLATION General: Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through - bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop print coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond - reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do '.a 898-07 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 METAL FABRICATIONS, CONT not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edges of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use metallic non -shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non -shrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at intervals not to exceed 40 feet. Provide slip joint with internal sleeve extending 2" beyond joint within 6" of posts. ADJUST AND CLEAN Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 898-07 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Framing with dimension lumber. Framing with engineered wood products. Blocking around door and window openings. Structural -use panels for backing. Wood furring, grounds, nailers and blocking. Wood framing. Air filter barrier. Sheathing Joint Treatment Floor Decking Roof Decking. Wall Sheathing. Metal framing anchors and attachments. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 "Finish Carpentry and Millwork" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in this Section. Rough carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise specified. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data for the following products: Engineered wood products. Air infiltration barrier. Metal framing anchors. Construction adhesives. Wood Treatment Data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing and finishing of treated materials. For each type of preservative treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. For water -borne treatment products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. 898-07 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY, CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that my be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Wood -Preservative -Treated Materials: Chemical Specialties, Inc. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. Hickson Corp. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. Laminated -Veneer Lumber: Alpine Structures. Boise Cascade Corp. Georgia-Pacific Corp. Trus Joist MacMillan. Willamette Industries, Inc. Parallel -Strand Lumber: Trus Joist MacMillan. Glass -Fiber Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing Board: Georgia-Pacific Corp. `Dens -Glass' Sheathing Joint Treatment: STS Coating - Liquid Tape LT-100. Metal Framing Anchors: Silver metal Products, Inc. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. LUMBER, GENERAL Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSO) Board of Review. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference with lumber grades and species include the following: SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory -marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. Where nominal sizes are indicated provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2" nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. WOOD PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative -treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and AWPA C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 898-07 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY, CONT Wood plates and blocking under wall caps. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut pieces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. DIMENSION LUMBER - General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule (NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated. Framing For Walls, Roof Rafters, Ceilings, Lintels and Beams: Provide framing of the following grade and species: Grade• No. 2. Species: Spruce -pine -fir south; NELMA or Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. Species and Grade: Any species of machine stress -rated (MSR) dimension lumber with -- a grade of 1450f-1.3E. BOARDS Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following: Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum, "S-DRY" or KD-19. Species and Grade: Hem -fir, C & Btr per WCLIB rules or C Select per NLGA or WWPA rules. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, A grade per NLGA or WWPA rules. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of 19 percent maximum moisture content (S-DRY or KD-19) and of following species and grade: Species and Grade: Western woods, Standard per WCLIB rules or No. 3 Common per WWPA --. rules. MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 2 Standard grade lumber. For board -size lumber, Provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA. ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS General: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that evidence compliance with building code in effect for this Project. Laminated veneer Lumber: Lumber manufactured by laminating wood veneers in a continuous press using an exterior -type adhesives complying with ASTM D 2559 to produce members with grain or veneers parallel with their lengths and complying with the following requirements: Veneer Characteristics: Douglas fir or southern pine veneers of varying thickness by widths and lengths standard with manufacturer, end -jointed with a lap -joint, butt joint, or scarf joint. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending (Fb): 2500 psi for 12-inch nominal depth members. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 2,000,000 psi. Tension Parallel to Grain (Ft): 1850 psi. ._; 898-07 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY, CONT Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 2800 psi. Compression Perpendicular to Grain: 400 psi perpendicular to and 500 psi and parallel to glue line. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 285 psi perpendicular to and 190 psi parallel to glue line. Parallel -Strand Lumber: Lumber manufactured by laying up wood strands using an exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559, and cured under pressure to produce members with grain of strands parallel to their lengths and complying with the following requirements: Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending (Fb): 2900 psi for 12-inch nominal depth members. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 2,000,000 psi. Tension Parallel to Grain (Ft): 2400 psi. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 2900 psi. Compression Perpendicular to Grain: 400 psi perpendicular to and 600 psi and parallel to wide face of strands. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 210 psi perpendicular to and 290 psi parallel to wide face of strands. WOOD -BASED STRUCTURAL -PANELS, GENERAL Structural -Use Panel Standard: Provide plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood." Trademark: Factory- marked structural -use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. CONCEALED PERFORMANCE -RATED STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS General: Where structural -use panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA performance -rated panels complying with requirements designated under each application for grade, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable). Thickness: Provide panels meeting requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. Wall Sheathing: APA=rated sheathing. Exposure Durability Classification: Exposure 1. Span Rating: As required to suit stud spacing indicated. Thickness: 1/2". Roof Sheathing: APA rated Structural sheathing. Exposure Durability Classification: Exposure 1. Span Rating: As required to suit joist spacing incicated. Thickness: 5/8", or as indicated. STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS FOR BACKING Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in 3/4" thickness. GYPSUM SHEATHING Glass -Fiber -Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing Board: Georgia Pacific `Dens -Glass Gold' Gypsum sheathing board consisting of noncombustible gypsum core incorporating a water-resistant material, surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats and alkali -resistant coating, and with unsurfaced square edges; complying with ASTM C 79 and requirements indicated below: Type: Regular. Thickness: 1/2 inch. Size: 4'-0" x 9'-0". AIR -INFILTRATION BARRIER Asphalt -saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated behind siding only. 898-07 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY, CONT FASTENERS General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. Power Driven Fasteners: CABO 'National Evaluation Report' NER-272. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. METAL FRAMING ANCHORS General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and as follows: Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation and with ASTM A 446, Grade A (structural quality); ASTM A 526 (commercial quality); or ASTM A 527 (lock -forming quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, and where indicated. Post Bases: Adjustable -socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch above base and with 2-inch minimum side cover, socket 0.064 inch thick, standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. Rafter or Truss Tie -Downs (Hurricane Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-5/8 inches wide by 0.052 inch thick. Simpson "Strong -Tie" #.2 or approved equal at each truss or joist end. Hold -Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of 2 bolts placed 7 bolt diameters from reinforced base. Bolt Diameter: 5/8 inch. Width: 2-1/2 inches. Body Thickness: 10 gage. Base Reinforcement Thickness: 0.180 inch. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Glass -fiber -resilient insulation fabricated in strip form for use as a sill sealer; 1 inch nominal thickness compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. (In rolls of 50' or 100' in length. At damp locations, provide (1/4) or 1/8 'Ethafoam Sheet'.) Water Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbonate (IPBC) as its active ingredient. 898-07 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY, CONT PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION, GENERAL Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and plywood. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: "Table 2304.9.1--Fastening Schedule" of the International Building Code (latest addition). Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. Use hot -dip galvanized or stainless -steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. Use self drilling and tapping screws to install roof deck plywood attic deck to wood framing members. WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved including handrails equipment, wall cabinets and wall accessories. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. WOOD FURRING Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL Framing Standards: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," and local building codes. 898-07 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY, CONT Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install framing composed of engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated. Do not splice structural members between supports. i Firestop concealed spaces of wood -framed walls and partitions as required by building code. WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING General: Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using 2 inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs; except single top plate may be used for non -load -bearing partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. For exterior walls provide 2 by 4 inch nominal size wood studs spaced 16 inches on center, except where otherwise indicated or required. For interior partitions and walls provide 2 by 4 inch nominal size wood studs spaced 16 inches on center. Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs. Provide miscellaneous _ blocking and framing as shown and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at mid -height of single -story partitions over 96 inches high and at midpoint of multi -story partitions, using 2 inch nominal thickness and same width as wall or partitions. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. For non -bearing partitions, install double -jamb studs and headers not less than 4 inch nominal depth for openings 36 inches and less in width, and not less than 6 inches nominal depth for wider openings. For load -bearing walls, install double -jamb studs for openings 72 inches and less in width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth shown, or if not shown, provide as recommended by AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction". Provide bracing in exterior walls, at both walls of each external corner, full -story height, unless otherwise indicated. Provide one of the following: Plywood panels not less than 48 by 96 inches applied vertically. Performance -rated structural -use panels, not less than 48 by 96 inches applied vertically. RAFTER AND CEILING JOIST FRAMING Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown up and not less than 1-112" bearing on wood and 3" on masonry. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. Where principal ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, frame as indicated with additional short joists from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to long joists or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1 by 8 inch nominal size or 2 by 4 inch nominal size stringers spaced 48 inches on center crosswise over main ceiling joists. Rafters: Install member size and spacing shown. Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use special metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing (if any), and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. At valleys, provide double -valley rafters of size shown, or if not shown, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. At hips, provide hip rafters of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafters. 898-07 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 7 ROUGH CARPENTRY. CONT Provide collar beams (ties) as shown, or if not shown, provide 2 by 6 inch nominal size boards between every second pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches on center. Locate below ridge member, one-third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. Provide special framing as shown for eaves, overhangs, dormers and similar conditions, as shown on drawings. COMPOSITE/LAMINATED VENEER BEAM FRAMING Framing: Install beams in accordance with drawings and approved manufacturer's shop drawings. Do not load beyond limits indicated. Do not notch, cut or bore beams unless previously approved by manufacturers and project engineer. At multiple pieces forming on beam, connect with 3 rows of 16d nails at 12" on center in each face or 2 rows 1/2" bolts staggered at 12" on center. At column bearing, provide 1/4" thick 'U' shaped saddle 12" L x 8" H x thickness of members. Thru-bolt with minimum 2-1/2" diameter bolts. INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions of above -referenced guide. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: Sheathing: Nail to framing. Decking: Self drilling and tapping screws. Plywood Backing Panels: Screw to supports. GYPSUM SHEATHING General: Fasten gypsum sheathing to supports with galvanized roofing nails. Nail to comply with manufacturer's recommended spacing and referenced fastening schedule. Keep perimeter fasteners 3/8 inches from edges and ends of board units. Fit units tightly against each other and around openings. Install 48 by 108 inch sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to and centered over studs. Install solid wood blocking wherever end joints do not occur over framing. Nail to each support in accordance with manufacturer's recommended spacing. Seal all joints at the exterior face with Liquid Tape LT-100. AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER Cover wall sheathing with air infiltration barrier to comply with manufacturer's printed directions. At brick veneer walls apply asphalt -saturated organic felt horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten gypsum sheathing to walls with galvanized staples or roofing nails. At EIFS walls apply asphalt -saturated organic felt horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end laps; fasten to face of wood studs with galvanized staples or roofing nails prior to installation of sheathing. Apply air infiltration barrier to cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap. 898-07 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 8 SECTION 06305 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is non-structural, and which is not specified as part of other sections. Types of finish carpentry work in this section include: Interior running and standing trim. Cabinetry. Cabinetry Hardware. Plywood paneling. Plastic laminate countertops. Shelving Rough carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6. Builders Hardware and wood doors are specified in section within Division 8. Flush Wood Doors are specified within Division S. SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Prior to beginning any work in mill, submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices, hardware and other components. Submit shop drawings for the following: Framed openings and lights, including trim. Casework. Shelving. Standing and running trim. Wall paneling. No work is to proceed until approved shop drawings have been returned. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Deliver in closed weathertight trailer. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. JOB CONDITIONS Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for finish carpentry installation areas. Do not install finish carpentry until required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. Wall paneling is to be stacked in the room it is to be installed in with separators between layers for one week to 10 days prior to installation. 898-07 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06305-1 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK, CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS Design and Construction Features: Comply with details shown for profile and construction of architectural woodwork; and, where not otherwise shown, comply with applicable Quality Standards. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate match and fit. Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1. Hardwood Lumber standard rules. Comply with National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific product comply with specified provision of the following: Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards." Glue -Up Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 56. MATERIALS General: Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown. Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide kiln -dried (KD) lumber with an average moisture content range of 9% to 13% for exterior work and 6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed the following: Interior Wood Finish: 5%-10o for mild regions (as defined by AWI). INTERIOR WOOD FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH: See drawings for location of different species. Solid Wood: Plain sawn FAS Red Oak complying with requirements for specified woodwork grade. Plywood: Plain sliced Red Oak hardwood plywood with exterior glue complying with requirements for specified woodwork grade. Premium. Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD-3 for type, thickness, color, pattern and finish indicated for each application, or if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard products. Quality Standards: For the following types of architectural woodwork; comply with indicated standards as applicable: Standing and Running Trim and Rails: AWI Section 300 Casework and Countertops: AWI Section 400 Shelving: AWI Section 600 Miscellaneous Work: AWI Section 700 Paneling: AWI Section 500 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Standing and Running Trim: Grade: Custom Fabricate standing and running trim to dimensions, profiles and details shown. Route or I 898-0'7 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06305-2 ( FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK, CONT groove reverse side (backed -out) of trim members to be applied to flat surface, except for members with ends exposed in finish work. Wood Casework, Transparent Finish: Grade: Custom Construction: Exposed face frames with banded doors and drawer fronts where shown. Wood Casework, Opaque Finish: Grade: Custom Construction: Exposed front frames with reveal, overlay doors and drawer fronts where shown. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Grade: Custom Interior Casework: Provide melanine at all interior faces of casework. CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS: General: Provide all cabinet drawer slide hardware only. Balance of cabinet hardware is included in other sections of these specifications. Hardware Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI A 156.9 "American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware". Drawer Hardware: Provide slides of types indicated, to accommodate each drawer size and style, equal to K&V 1300. Cabinet Door Hardware: Where overlay doors are shown, provide Grass American 1200 hinges with 1000 base plate; two (2) per leaf. (up to 3 feet; three (3) per leaf with heights from 3 feet to 6 feet; four (4) per feet with heights 6 feet to 8 feet). Door and Drawer Pulls: Stanley 4477, US260 Shelf Supports: Where shelving is indicated as "adjustable", provide slotted -type standards and brackets of type needed to support shelves with uniform 40-lb. per sq. ft. loading. Provide K & V No. 255 (screwed) with No. 256 supports or equal unless noted differently on the drawings. Shelf Supports: Where shelving is indicated as "adjustable", provide equally spaced dowel holes and Hafele plug in shelf supports #282.33 of color to match finish or slotted -type standard and brackets equal to K & V No.255 with 256 recessed supports as required to carry heavy loads, slotted -type standards and brackets of type needed to support shelves with uniform 40-lb. per sq. ft. loading. Provide K & V No. 255 (screwed) with No. 256 supports or equal unless noted differently on the drawings. Grommets: At each knee space provide Haffle 429.99 cable set or equal in color as selected to most closely match finish surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. INSTALLATION Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacturer with respect to surfaces, sized or patterns. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in V -0" for plumb and level 898-07 ,_; FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06305-3 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK, CONT countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching final finish where transparent is indicated. Hardwood Plywood Paneling: Where grain character or color variations are noticeable, select and arrange panels on each surface for best match of adjacent panels. Install with uniform tight joints between panels. Attach panels to supports with panel adhesive and temporary bracing or fasteners, plus nailing where covered by moldings (if any), in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for concealed -fastener installation. Cabinetry: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. Maintain millwork veneer sequence matching (if any) of casework with transparent finish. Miter at corners to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of handrails and railings. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Do not weld, cut or abrade surfaces or handrails and railing components which have been coated or finished after fabrication, and are intended for field connection by mechanical means without future cutting or fitting. For concrete and solid masonry, use drilled -in expansion shields and concealed hanger bolts, unless otherwise indicated. For stud partitions, use lag bolts fastened to wood blocking between studs at new construction and where possible, to studs at existing construction. ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Refer to Division 9 section for final finishing of installed finish carpentry work. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintained conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. 898-07 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 06305-4 i i E SECTION 06401 - ARCHITECTURAL COLUMNS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Exterior ornamental work including columns. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing and for blocking and other carpentry work concealed in the wall. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed exterior architectural woodwork. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Submit for approval samples of the architectural cast stone to be supplied which are representative of the general range of color and finish to be furnished. Eire -retardant -treatment data for material treated to reduce combustibility. Include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and reinforcing specified in'other Sections. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for exterior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. Setting contractor shall unload, store and set cast stone, and shall furnish attachment hardware, mortar, mortar color, caulk, sealers, ledge angles, structural bracing, structural support, and loose anchors. PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. Field Measurements: Where work is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 898-07 ARCHITECTURAL COLUMNS 06401 - 1 SECTION 06401 - ARCHITECTURAL COLUMNS, CONT Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Drawings are based on: Columns - Tuscan #200DC-R Poly/Marble Column Bottom Diameter - 14" Top Diameter - 12" Cap Width - 17-1/8" Manufactured by Melton Classics, Incorporated; Lawrenceville, Georgia. MATERIALS Provide every column component cast from fiber -reinforced polyester resin marble composite. Split columns after casting where required to be installed around structural members. Physical Properties Compressive strength, ASTM C-1194; 6500 psi min. for products 28 days Absorption, ASTM C-1195 or ASTM C-642; 6% max. for products 28 days. Multiply requirements of field cut or core drilled specimens by 80% to determine minimum compressive strength. INSTALLATION MATERIALS Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use, nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicted. Comply with ASME B18.6.1 for applicable requirements. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled - in -place anchors. Mortar: Type N, ASTM C-270 (white) FABRICATION, GENERAL Color and Finish: Color shall be natural limestone or white standard colors. Exposed surfaces shall exhibit a fine grained texture similar to natural stone. No bug holes or air voids are permitted. Variation: Match color and finish of approved sample subjected to similar aging and weathering conditions. ASTM color variation allowed - 2% hue, 6% lightness, chroma and hue combined. Curing and Finishing: Yard cure for 350 degree days prior to shipment. All surfaces shall be acid -etched to remove cement film prior to packaging for shipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION Condition to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. 898-07 ARCHITECTUF.AL COLUMNS 06401 - 2 SECTION 06401 - ARCHITECTURAL COLUMNS, CONT INSTALLATION Install plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level. Comply with Cast Stone Institute Technical Manual. j Set stones 1/8" or less within plane of adjacent unit. Joint Size: Stone/brick joints- 3/8"; Stone/stone joints vertical- 1/4" Stone/stone exposed top- 3/8" Joint Material: Use a full bed of mortar at all bed joints. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. Anchor columns to anchors or blocking build in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Clean stone by wetting with clear running water and applying a soluction of "Sure Kleen" -- #600 by ProSoCo, Products, Inc., or equal. Follow cleaner manufacturers instructions. ,- Repair obvious chips with touch-up material furnished by the manufacturer. 898-07 ARCHITECTURAL COLUMNS 06401 - 3 SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation and application of clear water repellent coating to the following vertical and nontraffic horizontal exposed surfaces: Exterior brick masonry. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide water repellents with the following properties based on testing manufacturer=s standard products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating Project conditions using same materials and application methods to be used for Project. Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens. Brick: ASTM C 67. Water -Vapor Transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 96. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Maximum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 514. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellency after 2500 hours of weathering in comparison to specimens before weathering, per ASTM G 53. Permeability' Minimum 80 percent breathable in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM D 1653. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data including manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements. Certification by water repellent manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of water repellents with Performance Requirements specified in the "Quality Assurance" article. QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who employs only persons trained and approved by water repellent manufacturer for application of manufacturer's products. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing products similar to those indicated for this Project and that has a record of successful in-service performance. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution -control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in the Project locale regarding volatile organic compounds (VOC) and use of hydrocarbon solvents. 898-07 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 1 WATER REPELLENTS, CONT Precautions: Water repellents are combustible materials and should be handled carefully. Do not use near fire or extreme heat and provide good ventilation to avoid build-up of solvent fumes. PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent (except with written recommendation of manufacturer) under any of the following conditions: Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F are predicted for a period of 24 hours. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces became wet. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated. WARRANTY General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Applicator and water repellent manufacturer covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1/16 inch wide, fire, vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment. Warranty Period: 5 Years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Construction documents is based upon the following: ProSoCo, Inc Weather Seal Siloxane. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Siloxanes: With more than 6.0 lb/gal. VOCs Aquanil Plus; ChemMasters. Diedrich 303S-7 Silox Seal; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. Thorosiloxane-8S; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. Shed OX; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Klere-Seal 908-SX; Pecora Corporation. Weather Seal Siloxane; ProSoCo, Inc. WATER REPELLENTS Siloxanes: Penetrating water repellent. Provide 6.7 percent concentration. Alkylalkoxysiloxanes that are oligomerous with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier. PART 3 - EXECUTI PREPARATION Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. Masonry: Clean masonry per ASTM D 5703. 898-07 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 2 ) WATER REPELLENTS, CONT Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is the possibility of the water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces, complying with manufacturer's cleaning recommendations. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until the sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. APPLICATION Apply a heavy -saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure 20 psi spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer=s written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated. Apply in a flooding application from bottom up with sufficient material applied to produce 6" to 8" rundown below contact point of spray pattern. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer=s written instructions. Apply second coat within three to five minutes of first coat in same flooding manner. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer=s Field Service: Provide services of a factory -authorized technical service representative to inspect and approve the substrate before application and to instruct the applicator on the product and application method to be used as required for warranty. CLEANING Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces soiled or damaged by water- repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application. Comply with manufacturer=s written cleaning instructions. 898-07 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 3 SECTION 07200 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of insulation work is shown on drawings and indicated by provisions of this section. Work of this section is to be included in the work under Division 9 section as shown. Applications of insulation specified in this section include the following: Blanket -type building insulation. Loose fill type building insulation. Board insulation is specified in masonry sections of Division 4. QUALITY ASSURANCE Thermal Conductivity: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity (k-value at 750F or 24°C) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as directed for equivalent use of material having a different thermal conductivity. Where insulation is identified by "R" value, provide appropriate thickness. Fire and Insurance Ratings: Comply with fire -resistance, flammability and insurance ratings indicated, and comply with regulations as interpreted by governing authorities. All materials under this section shall comply with the following requirements: Flame spread - 25 or less Smoke developed - 50 or less SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation and vapor barrier material required. Certified Tests: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance values, including k-values (aged values for plastic insulations), densities, compression strengths, burning characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings and similar ratings. PRODUCT HANDLING General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. Protection for Plastic Insulation: Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS Mineral/Glass Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Inorganic fibers formed into flexible resilient blankets or semi -rigid resilient sheets; FS HH-I-521; type as indicated, densities of not less than 0.5 lb. per cu.ft. for glass fiber units and not less than 898-07 INSULATION 07200 - 1 INSULATION, CONT 2.5 lb. per cu. ft. for mineral wool units, 1.0 lb. minimum, k-value of 0.27; manufacturer's standard lengths and widths as required to coordinate with spaces to be insulated; types as follows: Type I (Walls): 3-1/2" thick unfaced batts (R-11). Flame Spread Rating: 25 (ASTM E 84) facing. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: Certain -Teed Products Corp.; Valley Forge, PA Manville Bldg. Materials Corp.; Denver, CO Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.; Toledo, OH AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS Mechanical Anchors: Type and size as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSPECTION AND PREPARATION Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Install around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness as shown. General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor barriers from harmful weather exposures and from possible physical abuses, where possible by nondelayed installation of concealing work or,'where that is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure. Installer shall advise Contractor of exposure hazards, including possible sources of deterioration and fire hazards. 698-07 INSULATION 07200 - 2 SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Applications over expanded polystyrene board. Applications over exterior gypsum sheathing. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in system with elastomeric joint sealants. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum sheathing behind system. DEFINITIONS Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior composed of an an outer layer composed of a glass -fiber -mesh -reinforced base coat applied directly to board insulation and a textured protective finish coat. These assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction indicated. Designation PB for class of exterior insulation and finish systems specified in this section is based on the classification developed by the Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association (EIMA). System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation and finish systems. Thermal resistivity of the insulation board is designated by an r-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k- value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivity (r-- value) is expressed by the temperature difference between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through 1 square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide system complying with the following performance requirements: Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal -insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind system including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish. Physical Properties of Class PB: Provide Class PB exterior insulation and finish systems whose physical properties and structural performance comply with the following requirements when tested per methods referenced. Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: No evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, blistering, or deleterious effects after testing for 2,000 hours per ASTM G 23, Method 1 or ASTM G 53. Water Penetration: No water penetration into the plane of the intermost face of the test specimens under 2.86 psf of air pressure difference across the specimen during 15-minute test period when tested per ASTM E 331. Absorption -Freeze Resistance: No visible change when subjected to 4 days' underwater soak followed by 60 cycles of alternating exposure for 2 hours to minus 10 deg C and 2 hours to plus 20 deg C. Mildew Resistance: No mildew growth when tested per MIL Standard 810C, Method 508. 898-07 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 1 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB, CONT Water Vapor Transmission of Insulation: Sample, of 1-inch- thick insulation shows maximum permeability of 1 perm when tested per ASTM E 96, Water Method, Procedure B. Negative Wind Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 by 48 inches in size, consisting of studs, sheathing, and 1-inch- thick exterior insulation and finish system, shows capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each component of exterior insulation and finish systems. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard color charts and small-scale samples indicating available textural choices. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from either a single manufacturer or manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to those tested for the following fire test -response characteristics, as determined by testing per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 450 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver products in original, unopened packages and containers with manufacturer's labels identifying products legible and intact. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from the weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic, and other causes. Stack insulation boards flat and off the ground. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor temperatures are 40E F and falling unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above 40E F during installation of wet materials and until they have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant, but for not less than 24 hours after installation. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING Coordination installation of system with related work specified in other sections to 898-07 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 2 J EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB, CONT ensure that wall assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from weather, aging, corrosion, and other causes. _i PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Drawings and specifications are based on finish system and top coat system of: TEIFS Flex Wall System. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, other manufacturers offering Class PM Systems that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: Dryvit Systems, Inc. Pleko Products, Inc. Senergy Inc. MATERIALS Compatibility: Provide gypsum sheathing adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing fabrics, base and finish coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer. Provide color and texture of protective coating to comply with the following requirements: Provide or match TEIFS # TO11 SandDollar. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold, complying with ASTM C 578, approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner squareness, other dimensional tolerances, and the following: Age insulation in block form prior to cutting and shipping by air drying for not less than 6 weeks or by another method approved by system manufacturer that produces equivalent results. Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches and in thickness indicated but not less than that allowed by system manufacturer, nor more than 4 inches. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. Primer Adhesion Promoter: System manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use, compatible with substrate, and complying with the following requirements: Factory -mixed formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrates of type indicated, as approved by system manufacturer. TEIFS Adheez Reinforcing Fabric: Mesh for reinforcing over insulation. Balanced, alkali -resistant open -weave glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials made from continuous multiend strands with tensile strength of not less that 145 lbs. and 150 lbs. in warp and fill directions, respectively, per ASTM D 5035 and complying with ASTM D 578, and of the following minimum weight: 12.0 oz per sq. yd. TEIFS Mesh 12 Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials. Job -combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer emulsion adhesive and manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement. TEIFS Base DB 898-07 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 3 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB, CONT Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: Factory -mixed formulation of polymer or acrylic emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. TEIFS Flex Tejas Water: Clean and potable. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and comply with system manufacturer's requirements, manufactured from vinyl plastic and complying with ASTM C 1063. Casing Bead: Prefabricated one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating, and thickness of insulation as well, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating. Drip Screed: Prefabricated 1-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating, and thickness of insulation as well, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and extended to form a drip. MIXING General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition for installation of system. Do not proceed with installation of system until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling resulting from application of systems. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coatings on other work. Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates. Apply surface sealer over substrates where required by system manufacturer for improving adhesion. INSTALLATION General: Comply with system manufacturer's current published instructions for installation of system as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. Water Barrier Membrane: Install over steel studs, secured with tape and adhesive immediately before installation of sheathing. Exterior Sheathing Board: Install on metal framing to comply with sheathing board manufacturer's recommendations. Install with steel drill screws over water barrier. Space fasteners no more than 8 inches o.c. along framing with perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 inch but less than 5/8 inch from edges of boards. Apply trim accessories at perimeter of system, at expansion joints, and elsewhere, as indicated. Use drip screed at bottom edge of system unless otherwise indicated. Use casing beads at other locations. Secure insulation board to sheathing with a full bed adhesive after sheathing joints 898-07 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 4 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB, CONT and screw heads have been sealed. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so that no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints at least 6 inches from corners of window and door openings. Offset joints of insulation at least 4 inches from joints in sheathing. Offset joints of insulation at least 4 inches from decorative grooves (false joints). Interlock ends at internal and external corners. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards. If gaps occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert without use of adhesive. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch from surface of insulation and yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes conforming to details indicated. Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated or required by system manufacturer. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within system and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated. Treat exposed edges of insulation board, including those forming substrates of sealed joints within system or between system and other work, by encapsulating with base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat, unless otherwise indicated. Treat edges of insulation board at trim accessories by extending base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat over face leg of accessories. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating. Apply base coat to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness specified by system manufacturer. -.-' Embed reinforcing fabric of type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle - free installation with fabric continuous or lapped at corners and lapped or otherwise treated at joints to comply with system manufacturer's requirements. Completely embed fabric, applying additional base coat material if necessary, so that reinforcing fabric pattern is not visible. Additional Reinforcing Fabric: Apply strip reinforcing fabric around openings extending 4 inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 8 by 16 inch strip reinforcing fabric diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch wide strip reinforcing at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of fabric is lapped at least 4 inches on each side of corners. Embed strip reinforcing fabric in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing fabric. Apply finish coat over base coat in thickness required by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color matching approved sample. Provide medium or heavy sand float finish to match approved sample. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and with EIMA "Joint Sealant Specifications for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Class PB and PM." Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and system manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately after tooling joints without disturbing joint seal. 898-07 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 5 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB, CONT Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove protective coatings from window and door frames and any other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive protective coating. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer and system manufacturer that ensures system's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 898-07 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB 07241 - 6 SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY - This section includes asphalt shingles for steep roofs of 2-1/2" in 12" slope or greater. Types of shingle applications specified in this section include the following: New asphalt shingle roofing and underlayment. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: - Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for underlayment and wood framing. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal: for flashing, trim gutters, and other sheet metal work. Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties and Accessories for skylights and other roof penetrations. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of product specified, installation instructions, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's sample finishes showing full range of colors and profiles available. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products that are identical to those tested for the specified fire performance characteristics by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Fire Resistance Ratings: UL. Class "A". Wind -Resistance -Test Characteristics: Wind -resistant asphalt shingles tested according to ASTM D 3161 or UL 997 and passed. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened, bundles or containers with labels intact. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job -site storage and protection. PROJECT CONDITIONS Substrate: Proceed with shingle work only after substrate conditions re acceptable and penetrating work has been completed. Weather Conditions: Proceed with Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit Work to be installed in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and when substrate is completely dry. 898-07 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 1 ASPHALT SHINGLES, CONT WARRANTY General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made under requirements of the Contract Documents. Warranty Period: Provide 2 year warranty by the roofing installer to furnish all labor and material required to repair roof due to workmanship or material failure. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of shingles beyond normal weathering. Warranty period is 25 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Drawings are based on: ELK 'Prestique I' Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer offering asphalt shingles that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Celotex Corporation. Certian Teed Corporation Elk Corporation. GAF Building Materials Corporation. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc. ASPHALT SHINGLES Colors, Blends, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide asphalt shingles with the following requirements: Provide selection from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns for asphalt shingles of type indicated. Three -Dimensional, Fiberglass Laminated Strip Shingle, UL Class "A": Mineral- surfaced, self-sealing, laminated multi -ply overlay construction fiberglass based strip shingle complying with ASTM D 3018, Type 1, and with ASTM D 3462. Provide shingles bearing UL Class "A" fire -test -response classification that passes the wind -resistance -test requirements of ASTM D 3161, weighing not less than 300 lbs. per square. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard factory precut units to match shingles. ACCESSORIES Felt Underlayment: No. 30, asphalt -saturated organic felt, complying with ASTM D 226 Type II, 36" wide. Asphalt Plastic Cement: Nonasbestos fibrated asphalt cement complying with ASTM D 4586, designed for trowel application. Nails: Aluminum or hot -dipped galvanized steel, 11- or 12- gage sharp pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks, minimum 3/8" diameter head, and of sufficient length to penetrate through plywood sheathing. Material of nails in contact with flashing shall match materials selected for flashing to prevent galvanic action. Metal Drip Edge: Minimum 28 gage galvanized metal sheet, brake -formed to provide minimum 2" roof deck flange, and minimum 3/4" fascia flange with 3/8" drip at lower edge. Furnish in 8' or 10' lengths. Nail at 8 inches to 10 inches apart along inner edge. 898-07 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 2 -= ASPHALT SHINGLES, CONT Metal Flashing: 26-gage prefinished metal. Job -cut to sizes and configurations required. Valley Flashing: Minimum 24" wide, 26 gage galvanized metal. Provide prefinished metal for exposed valleys. Valley flashing shall be preformed with inverted "V" profile at center of valley. PART 3 - EXECUTION WVTMTXTATT~ Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Clean substrate of any projections and substances detrimental to shingling work. Cover knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with roofing nails. Coordinate installation of shingles with flashing and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not install shingle roofing until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roofing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. Provide underlayment as stated below as soon as deck is prepared to provide complete weather protection for the existing structure. INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, but not less than recommended by "the NRCA Steep Roofing Manual." Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing with nails. Felt Underlayment: Apply one layer felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to receive asphalt shingles, lapping succeeding courses 2 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches, and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofing nails to hold underlayment in place until shingle application. Fasten metal drip edge along the bottom edge (eaves) before felt or underlayment is laid and to the sides (rakes) after the felt is laid. Install asphalt shingles beginning at lower end with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted shingles with tabs removed. Lower edge to be even with extended drip edge leg. Fasten shingles in pattern, with weather exposure, and using number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines or premarked underlayment to ensure straight coursing. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at ridges and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. Fasteners at ridges shall be of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. Pattern: Random spacing offset at succeeding courses. Valley Construction: Closed -cut. Flashing and Edge Protection: Install metal flashing, vent flashing and edge protection as indicated and in accordance with details and recommendations of the "Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual." Closed Valley Flashing: Lay a 24" wide valley liner of 26-gage galvanized iron. Fasten on outer edges only. Lay all shingles on one side of valley and across center line of valley a minimum of 12". Fasten a minimum of 6" away from center line on each side of valley. Strike a chalk line 2" from the center line of the unshingled side. Apply shingles on the unshingled side up to chalk -line and trim, taking care not to cut the 898-07 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 3 ASPHALT SHINGLES, CONT underlaying shingles, cement and fasten. Step Base Flashing: Used on the sides of chimneys, dormers, roof curbs, and walls. - Vertical leg of flashing at walls is to be installed behind and prior to wall sheathing. Secure to studs. Cut galvanized metal flashing pieces B" x 10" and bend in half, 8" x 5" each side. Apply base felt on top of metal set in Black Plastic Cement. To allow for possible roof movement, do not fasten flashing to wall. Carry metal cap, counter flashing, or the wall siding material down over the step flashing. Apply shingles up to base of wall using vertical front wall base flashing in front of wall and step flashing along sides. Apply vertical flashing at all sides of curbs and walls. Vent Pipes: Apply shingles up to vent pipe and cut hole in next shingle to go over pipe. Set the shingle in roofing cement. Cut lead flashing flange and place over shingle and vent pipe, set in roofing cement. Rest of shingles are then cut around pipe and all are set in roofing cement. Turn all lead flashing 1" down into top of vent stack without restricting vent area. ADJUSTING Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials meeting specified requirements. 898-07 ASPHALT SHINGLES - SECTION 07410 - MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL ---, RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes manufactured roof panels of the following type: Formed roof panels with applied batten. Certified UL Class 90 uplift rating. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for roof flashing and other sheet metal work. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field -applied panel sealants. Wood framing and decking are specified in Division 6 section. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in accordance with specified test methods for each system. Air Infiltration: Provide roof panel system with no air leakage when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at pressure differentials up to 1.57 psf. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data including manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, installation instructions, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel system. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color chips showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for roof and wall panels with factory -applied finishes. Shop Drawings showing layouts of panels on walls and roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, corners, panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory and field assembly work. QUALITY ASSURANCE Wind Uplift: Provide roof panel system including supports meeting requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for Class 90 wind uplift resistance. Field Measurements: Where possible, prior to fabrication of panels, take field measurements of structure of substrates to receive panel system. Allow for trimming panel units where final dimensions cannot be established prior to fabrication. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels so that they will not 898-07 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07410 - 1 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS, CONT accumulate water. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. WARRANTY Finish Warranty: . Furnish panel manufacturer's written warranty covering failure of the factory -applied exterior finish on metal roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be, in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. Warranty period for factory -applied exterior finished on roof panels is 20 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Workmanship Warranty: Furnish a workmanship warranty for the entire roof system. Warrant that the roof system is installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and U.L. guidelines. Warrant that the system will be free of defective workmanship and will remain watertight and water proof for the warranty period of 2 (two) years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Drawings are based on MBCI - HB16.5 panels, 24 gage, UL 90 rated. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal roof panel systems that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: Steel Roof Panels: AEP-Span. ASC Pacific, Inc. Atlas Aluminum Corp. Berridge Manufacturing Co. Cheney Flashing Company. Flexospan. Inryco Architectural Products. Metal Building Components, Inc. (MBCI). Merchant & Evans, Inc. ("Zip -Rib"). Molenco. Morin Building Products Co., Inc. MM Systems Corp. Petersen Aluminum Corp. H.H. Robertson Company. E.G. Smith Construction Products, Inc. Steelite, Inc. Vincent Metals. Vin-Cor Steel Corp. SHEET MATERIALS Structural Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525, Grade C or to suit manufacturer's standards. METAL FINISHES General: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels, as required by coating process and as required for maximum coating performance capability. Protect coating either by application of strippable film or by packing plastic film or other suitable material between panels in a manner to properly protect the finish. Furnish air -drying spray finish in matching color for touch-up. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards colors. 898-07 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07410 - 2 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS, CONT Fluoropolymer Coating: Manufacturer's standard two -coat, thermo-cured, full-strength 70 percent "Kynar 500" coating consisting of a primer and a minimum 0.75-mil dry film thickness with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9-mil and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested in accordance with ASTM D 523. Durability: Provide coating that has been field tested under normal range of weathering conditions for minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or check in finish; without chalking in excess of No. 8 in accordance with ASTM D 659; and without fading in excess of 5 NBS units. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and meet U.L. requirements. Use aluminum, corrosion -resistant steel, or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application. Felts: Provide Metal -Mate film surface leak barrier conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 1970. 60 mils thick with SBS modified asphalt adhesive. Accessories: Except as indicated as work of another specification section, provide components required for a complete roof panel system, including trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, louvers, sealants, gaskets fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, self -extinguishing, expanded cellular rubber or cross -linked polyolefin foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roof panels. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive 100 percent solids polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. Joint Sealant: One -part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant as recommended by the building manufacturer. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC paint 12, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. PANEL FABRICATION General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as required to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional requirements and with structural requirements. Fabricate panel joints with captive factory installed gaskets or sealants. Fabricate panel joints with captive factory installed gaskets or separator strips, which provide a tight seal and prevent metal -to- metal contact in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel system. o V mnT. T c Face Sheets: Fabricate roof panel face sheets to the profile or configuration indicated from 24-gage (0.0239-inch) zinc -coated or aluminum -zinc -coated steel sheets. Standing Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory -formed standing -seam roof panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof using a concealed clip. Clips: Provide 16-gage UL 90 panel clips designed to meet negative load requirements. 898-07 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07410 - 3 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS, CONT PART 3 - EXECUTI PANEL INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. Install panels with concealed fasteners. Install roof panels over minimum 3:12 pitch solid substrate with one ply of `Metal Mate' installed from lower edge up with at least 3-inch side laps and 4-inch end laps. Lap felt with all flashing in a shingle manner. Valleys should receive a special underlayment of bituthane which should be put down first, extending 4'-0" up from the center of the valley on each side. The `Metal Mate' should then overlap this underlayment. Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof or wall panel system, including trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel systems. Provide types of gaskets, sealants, and fillers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. Standing Seam Roof Panel System: Fasten roof panels to supports with concealed clip in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Install clips at each support with self-drilling/self-tapping fasteners at a maximum of 18" on center at midspans and 12" at ends. All panels are to be continuous without endlaps Install factory -caulked cleats at standing -seam joints. Apply snap -on batten to the panels to provide a weathertight joint. Seaming: Complete seaming of panel joints by operation of portable power -driven equipment of type recommended by panel manufacturer to provide a weathertight joint. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20'-0" on level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films (if any) as soon as each panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction. 898-07 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 07410 - 4 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: Roof drainage systems. Gutters Downspouts Metal flashing. Trim. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 4 Sections for through -wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified as part of masonry work. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. Division 7 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane as part of roofing -system work. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. Product data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. Shop drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages details. Including major counter flashings, trim/fascia units, gutters, downspouts, and equipment curbs or runners. Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. PROJECT CONDITIONS Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of the Work and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS METALS Coil -Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc -coated, commercial -quality steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 755, G 90 (ASTM A 755M, Z 275) coating designation, coil coated with high-performance fluoropolymer coating as specified in "Coil -Coated Galvanized 898-07 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM, CONT Steel Sheet Finish" Article; not less than 0.0336 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES Fasteners: Self tapping, 1" 304 stainless steel with sealing washer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed; complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather -resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and thickness required for performance. Gutter Dome Strainer Screen: 1/4-inch hardware cloth installed in sheet metal frames. Fabricate screen and frame of same basic material as gutters. FABRICATION, GENERAL Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Form exposed sheet metal Work without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges back to form hems. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams and solder. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less that thickness of metal being secured. 898-07 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 :.J SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM, CONT SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. Gutters: Fabricate from the following material: Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. Coil -Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. Downspouts: Fabricate from the following material: Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. thick. Coil -Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material: Aluminum: 0.320 inch thick. Coil -Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. Eave Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: Coil -Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. COIL -COATED GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISH High -Performance Organic Coating Finish: Apply the following system by coil -coating process on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by coating manufacturers and applicator. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION General: Except as otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints and soldered seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. Roof Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof -drain flashing installation with 898-07 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM, CONT roof -drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep - sloped roofs with roofing installation. Anchor downspouts to wall with 1" sheet metal strips at 5'-0" on center maximum. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof -penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping. Install dome screens at downspouts with noncorrosive fasteners, arranged as hinged units to swing open for cleaning. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. Provide final Protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. 898-07 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below: Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. Interior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. Other joints as indicated on the drawings. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish - and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 898-07 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 SECTION 7920 - JOINT SEALANTS, CONT PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. When joint substrates are wet. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are,less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS. GENERAL Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with furgicide for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates around ceramic tile, showers, sinks and plumbing fixtures. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: "Dow Corning 790, 795"; Dow Corning Corp. Sonneborn Sonolastic N.P. II One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25, Uses NT, M, A and, as applicable to joints substrates indicated, O for sealing at exterior and interior door and window joints where "caulk" is indicated. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: "Sonolastic NP 1"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chem. Prod. Inc. JOINT SEALANT BACKING General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing 898-07 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 SECTION 7920 - JOINT SEALANTS, CONT optimum sealant performance: Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests and field tests. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturer's of sealant and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION nnvDAD nTT( KT Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer and the following requirements: Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust; paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellants; water, surface dirt and frost. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated; except where more stringent requirements apply. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: Install joint -fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint -fillers. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint -fillers. Remove absorbent joint -fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. 898-07 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 SECTION 7920 - JOINT SEALANTS, CONT Tooling of Nonsag Sealants; Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealant to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. Provide concave joint configuration, per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. 898-07 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 SECTION 08110 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY - This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: Doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior and exterior locations. -- Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, and other interior and exterior openings of following type: Welded unit type at exterior and vault. Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the following: Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted. Painting of primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting". Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 Section. Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section. Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. " Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommendation Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver doors and frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finish doors and frames. 898-07 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES, CONT Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard steel doors and frames by one of the following: Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Ceco Corp. Fenestra Corp. Republic Builders Products. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. MATERIALS Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: and ASTM A 568. Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames." DOORS Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on drawings or schedules: Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 4, minimum 16-gage or 14-gate galvanized steel faces as scheduled. FRAMES Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 18-gage cold -rolled steel at interior. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, welded construction for exterior and fire door applications and knocked -down for field assembly at interior applications. Form exterior frames from 16-gage galvanized steel. Form interior frames from 18-gage steel. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double door frames. 898-07 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES, CONT Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory -assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100 requirements. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard small cell honeycomb over the entire surface. Provide polyurethane, polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non -fire -rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold -rolled steel. Fabricate doors to be mortised and reinforced with full height with minimum 11-gage steel lock edge channel welded at a maximum of 5" o.c. Provide continuous top and bottom 16-gage steel channels welded at a maximum of 2-1/2" o.c. Lock edge shall have a continuous welded and planished seam at panel joint. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. Exposed Fasteners: unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Door Hinge reinforcement shall have a minimum of 3/16" total thickness. Reinforcement for closers shall be a minimum of 12-gate steel. FRAME REINFORCEMENT Hinge reinforcement plates shall be a minimum of 9-gage steel. Strike reinforcement shall be a minimum of 14-gage steel, extruded and formed to an equivalent of 10-gage. Closer reinforcement shall be a minimum of 12-gage steel. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at project site. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute. 898-07 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES, CONT r Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. Apply shop .coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSPECTION Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. TATCMnT T nMT-WT General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated. Place welded frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. In plaster or masonry walls constructed with antifreeze additives, protect inside (concealed) faces of door frames using fibered asphalt emulsion coating. Apply approximately 1/8" thick over shop primer and allow to thoroughly dry before handling. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry Tee anchors. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. In in -place drywall partitions install knock down slip-on drywall frames. At steel studs with wood blocking, use wood stud anchors. Attach integral sill anchors to slab with power actuated concrete fasteners at all frames. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. Install fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. ADJUST AND CLEAN Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating conditions. 898-07 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. This Section includes the following: Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry and Millwork" for wood door frames. Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in another Division-8 section. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers, and factory -finishing specifications. Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for veneer matching and other pertinent data. Use same reference numbers for details and openings as those on the original contract documents. For factory machined fire -rated doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. PROJECT CONDITIONS Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: AWI quality standard including Section 100-5-11 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content". 898-0'7 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, CONT WARRANTY General Warranty: Door Manufacturer's Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 by 84 inch section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 inch span, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors of one of the following: Solid Core Doors: Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Buell Door Company. Chappell Door Company. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. Ideal Wood Products, Inc. V-T Industries, Inc. Weyerhauser Company. INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: Faces: Red oak, plain sliced. AWI Grade: Custom. Construction: 5 plies. Core: Particleboard core. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. VENEER MATCHING Within Door Faces: Provide doors with the following veneer matching: Book matching. FABRICATION Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: Comply with tolerance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire -resistance -rated doors. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory machining. 898-07 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, CONT PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, anchorage and swing characteristics, and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. Reject doors with defects. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Hardware: For installation see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. Fitting Clearances for Non -Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch at jambs and heads; 1/16 inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8 from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. Bevel non -rated doors 1/8" in 2" (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" (3-1/2 degrees) in lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. Field -Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: Division 9 Section "Painting". Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. Finished Doors: Replace doors damaged during installation. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 898-07 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 SECTION 08550 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following unfinished wood window types: Casement Fixed Window Units. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry and Millwork" for interior and exterior wood trim and shutters that is not included as part of the wood window units. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealing between wood windows and adjacent materials. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory prime -coated wood windows. DEFINITIONS Performance -grade number, included as part of the window designation system, is the actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. Structural test pressure, wind load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. Water -leakage -resistance test pressure is equivalent to 10 percent of the design pressure with 2.86 lb/sq. ft. as a minimum. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide wood windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, and sizes required for this Project according to test methods indicated. Standards: Performance requirements for operating force, air infiltration, water penetration, structural performance and forced- entry resistance for wood windows are those specified in I\IWWDA I.S. 2 "Industry Standard for Wood Window Units." Performance Requirements: Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated in NWWDA I.S. 2 for operating force, air infiltration, water penetration, structural performance, and forced -entry resistance for the type and performance grade of window units required. Where required design pressure exceeds the minimum for the specified window grade, comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2, Article 6, "Optional Performance Classifications," for higher than minimum performance grades. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 10 percent of the structural test pressure. Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of any member's span after removing the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 22.5 lbf/sq. ft. Thermal Performance: Each window unit shall meet or exceed the following average thermal values as tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976. Total U-value 0.35 Btu/sq.ft. X h X deg F for fixed insulated low-E gray tinted glazing clad window units. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: Product data for each type of wood window required, include the following: Construction details and fabrication methods. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. 898-07 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 1 WOOD WINDOWS, CONT Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning exterior surfaces. Provide highlighted or underlined copies indicating above items that will be provided for this Project. Shop drawings for each type of window required, including information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following: Layout and installation details, including anchors. Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50) scale. Hardware, including operators. Glazing details. Accessories. Samples for initial color selection on 12-inch long sections of window members. Where finishes involve normal color variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose windows have been certified under the NWWDA "Hallmark Program" for wood window units, are listed in the current NWWDA "Membership and Product Directory," and complies with requirements indicated. Provide only wood window units bearing a NWWDA "Hallmark Program" label certifying compliance with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain wood window units from one source and by a single manufacturer. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating -glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component pane of units with the appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Check actual window openings in construction work by accurate field measurement before fabrication of custom window units. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows with field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. WARRANTY General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship with the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to the following: Structural failures, including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. Deterioration of finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. Warranty Period for Insulating Glass: 5 years after the date of substantial completion. 898-07 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 2 WOOD WINDOWS, CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS Drawings are based on: Pella ProLine with gray tinted, low-e, insulated glass and interior removable muntin bars. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide window units by one of the following: Aluminum -Clad Wood Window Units: Marvin Windows Pella Corporation Weather Shield Mfg., Inc. Vinyl -Clad Wood Window Units: Anderson Corp. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc. MATERIALS General: Comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2. Wood: Clear Ponderosa Pine or other suitable fine-grain lumber, kiln -dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and is free of visible finger -joints, blue stain, knots, pitch -pockets and surface checks larger than 1/32-inch wide by 2 inches long. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining per NWWDA I.S. 4. Aluminum Cladding: Manufacturer's standard aluminum formed sheet or extruded cladding mechanically bonded to exterior wood sash and frame members. Trim members: Aluminum -clad wood trim. Trim members: Provide either aluminum -clad wood, or hollow -aluminum extrusions, or roll -formed aluminum trim members. Finish: Factory -applied, baked -on enamel finish. Color: Color as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard color range. Vinyl Cladding: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl cladding, consisting of a rigid polyvinyl chloride sheath, complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 14344-C, not less than - 35-mil average thickness, in permanent white paintable finish, mechanically bonded to exterior wood sash and frame members. Trim Members: Vinyl -clad wood trim or hollow vinyl extrusions. Casing Trim and Extensions: Provide manufacturers interior casing, extensions and other exposed trim from unfinished red oak for curved or straight pieces. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips and window accessories of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or hot -dip zinc -coated steel or iron complying with the requirements of ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (severe) service condition; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Fasteners: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation fasteners. Use zinc -coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and installation. Use brass screws for hardware and accessory installation. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's standard clear, sealed, insulating glazing material that complies with Division 8 Section "Glazing." High Performance Sun -Insulated Glass: Hermetically sealed 5/8" insulating glass units with SIGMA Class A sealant type edge construction, and dry air or gas -filled air space enclosed by two sheets of glass and warranted for minimum of ten years 898-07 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 3 WOOD WINDOWS, CONT against failure of hermetic seal. Provide gray tinted, low-e glass. Glazing Seal: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded, vinyl, or butyl glazing gasket providing weather weathertight seal. ACCESSORIES Grilles (False Muntins): Provide grilles in designs shown, for removable application to inside of each sash light. Material: Unfinished oak. Design: Rectangular. Color: Field stain to match Architect=s sample. FIXED WINDOWS Provide fixed wood window units in locations, sizes, and configurations indicated. Window Grade: Comply with the requirements of AAMA/NWWDA Performance Grade DP 15. crronrnt,mr�wr General: Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are indicated, fabricate wood window units to comply with indicated standards. include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. Comply with requirements of AAMA/NWWDA I.S. 2 for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. Fabricate windows to produce units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing. Provide openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items. Each window unit includes sash, frame, stops, sill (including undersill or nosing), exterior casing and moldings, integral mullions and muntins, hardware, and accessories. Provide glazing stops, nailed or snap -on type, coordinated with glass selection and glazing system indicated. Factory -Glazed Window Units: Glaze window units at the shop before delivery. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing" of these Specifications and AAMA/NWWDA I.S. 2. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to the Project site, to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine openings before beginning installation. Verify that the rough or masonry opening is correct and the sill plate is level. Do not proceed with installation of window units until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Masonry surfaces shall be dry, and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound and well -nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches of the corner. Coordinate window installation with wall flashings and other built-in components. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installing window units, hardware, operators, accessories, and other components of the Work. Set window units plumb, level, true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. 898-07 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 4 WOOD WINDOWS, CONT Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 sections for joint fillers and sealants required to be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinate window installation with wall flashings and other built-in components. Fill all voids between window unit perimeter and frame or masonry rough opening from the inside with expanding foam insulation. Clean interior and exterior surfaces immediately after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants, dirt, and other substances. Clean glass of factory -glazed units promptly after installing windows. Wash and polish glass on both faces before Substantial Completion (not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for final inspection). Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism. PROTECTION Protect window units from damage or deterioration until the time of Substantial Completion. Institute and maintain protection and other precautions required through remainder of construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 898-07 WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 5 SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. This Section includes the following: Hinges. Lock cylinders and keys. Lock and latch sets. Bolts. Exit devices. Closers. Door Trim units. Protection plates. Thresholds. Silencers for all metal and wood frames. Weatherstripping for exterior doors. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry and Millwork" for cabinet hardware. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers integral with hollow metal frames. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors for door hardware. HARDWARE ALLOWANCE Door hardware supplier's responsibilities shall be as follows: Submittals: Submit through Contractor required product data, final hardware schedule, separate keying schedule, and samples as specified in this Section, unless otherwise indicated. Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor promptly of estimated times and dates that will be required to process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver hardware, and to perform other work associated with furnishing door hardware for purposes of including this data in construction schedule. Comply with this schedule. Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as required to coordinate new and existing hardware with other work in respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish Contractor with templates and deliver hardware to proper locations. Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and inventory door hardware. Discrepancies: Between new and existing hardware based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at time of door hardware selection, furnish types, finishes, and quantities of door hardware, including fasteners, and Owner's maintenance tools required to comply with specified requirements and as needed to install and maintain hardware. Furnish or replace any items of door hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items at no cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed receipts from Contractor for all delivered materials. Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows: Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for door hardware in same manner as submittals for other work. Construction Schedule: Cooperate with door hardware supplier in establishing scheduled dates for submittals and delivery of templates and door hardware. Incorporate in construction schedule the times and dates related to furnishing hardware by door hardware supplier. Coordination: Coordinate door hardware with other Work. Furnish hardware supplier 898-07 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE, CONT of manufacturer with shop drawings of other work where required or requested. Verify completeness and suitability of hardware with supplier. Product Handling: Provide secure lock -up for hardware salvaged or delivered to the site. Inventory hardware jointly with representative or hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish or door hardware. Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Provide three (3) copies of schedule with cut sheets and product information of all items listed in the schedule. Hardware schedules are intended for coordination of Work. Provide same opening numbers or item numbers as listed in the construction documents for all schedules. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single Source Responsibility: obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in- service performance (minimum five years) for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and NFPA 101 (1994) and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels. Accessibility Standards: Provide hardware that complies with ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act - 1990 - Title these provisions "Public Accomodations and Commercial Facilities". Hardware shall also comply with TAS - Texas Accessibility Standards. MnTMTrWnMrr Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 898-07 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE, CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Butts and Hinges: Hager Hinge Co. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works Cylinders and Locks: Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. Falcon Lock Co. Sargent Manufacturing Company. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. Bolts - Glynn -Johnson Corp. Hager Hinge Co. H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works. Exit/Panic Devices: Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. Dor-O-Matic'. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc. Sargent Manufacturing Company. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. Overhead Closers: Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. Norton Door Controls, Div., Yale Security Inc. Door Trim Units: Hager Hinge Co. H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company. Kick and Armor Plates: Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. Hager Hinge Co. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). Door Stripping and Seals: National Guard Products, Inc. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. Reese Enterprises, Inc. Zero International, Inc. Thresholds: National Guard Products, Inc. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. Reese Enterprises, Inc. Zero International, Inc. SCHEDULED HARDWARE Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities _ of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Door Schedule" on the drawings. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION Door Hardware: Handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping. Tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate, Hardware for passage shall be mounted no higher than 48" above finished floor. 898-07 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE, CONT Hand of Door: The drawings show the direction of swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door movement as shown. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint' surfaces to receive painted finish. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. HINGES AND BUTTS Templates: Except for hinges and butts to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template -produced units. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements: For metal doors and frames install machine screws into.drilled and tapped holes. For wood doors and metal frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. For fire -rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded -to -the -head steel wood screws. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: Out -Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins. Out -Swine Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finish to match leaves, except where decorative tip (HT) indicated. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. Fire -Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. 898-07 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE, CONT LOCK CYLINDERS, CORES AND KEYING Standard System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new masterkey system for Project. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin brass tumbler cylinders with finish to match locking hardware. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. Key Quality: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 3 master keys for each master system, and 3 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. Deliver keys to Owner. LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by manufacturer. Provide extra long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other cylinder or bored and preassembled types of locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead bolts. CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated. Access -Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are required for doors to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. Door Closing: If a door has a closer then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 t seconds to move to a point 3" from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be as follows: Fire doors shall have the minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority. Other Doors: Exterior Hinged Doors: (No requirement at this time). Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that may hold the door in a closed position. Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers. DOOR TRIM UNITS Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self -tapping screws. 898-07 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE, CONT Fabricate edge trim of material to match hardware finish to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of protection plates. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. Furnish as shown below to match existing door hardware in surrounding areas. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage). Metal plates: Brass or bronze, 0.062 inch (U.S. 16 gage). WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface applied. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold seal strips consisting of contact - type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size shown and of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip: Extruded bronze (brass), finish to match doors, 0.050-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. Solid neoprene wiper. Solid neoprene wiper. THRESHOLDS General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled. All thresholds to meet ADAAG height and bevel requirements. Exterior Hinged Doors: Provide units not less than 9 inches wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames, and as follows: Pemko 170A. SILENCERS General: At all wood jamb doors, and interior hollow metal jambs latch side provide 3 rubber silencers 'Trimco' #1229A at strike jamb. HARDWARE FINISHES Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry -recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION TMCMTT T 1% TYn.1 Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." 898-07 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE, CONT Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. 898-07 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7 SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Gypsum board assemblies attached to wood framing and furring members. Gypsum board bonded adhesively to interior masonry substrates. Glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum backing board installed with gypsum board assemblies. FRP Panels over gypsum board assemblies. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for the following. Wood blocking, framing, and furring. Division 7 "Insulation" for wall insulation and vapor barriers concealed behind gypsum board assemblies. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each time of product specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where fire -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer, or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials in original packages, container or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Store materials inside under cover and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged. 898-07 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES, CONT PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced gypsum board application standards, ASTM C 840 and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, for environmental conditions before, during and after application of gypsum board. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 55 degrees F maintain continuous, uniform, comfortable building working temperatures of not less than 55 degrees F for a minimum period of 48 hours prior to, during and following application of gypsum board and joint treatment materials or bonding of adhesives. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Gypsum Board and Related Products: Domtar Gypsum Georgia-Pacific Corp. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. United States Gypsum Co. Manufacturers of FRP Panels: Dyrotech Industries - Kimlite Glasboard United States Gypsum - Marlite FRP Panels GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, of types, edge configuration and thickness indicated; in maximum lengths available to minimize end- to -end butt joints. (8' x 4' for ceiling 8'-0" and lower, 9' x 4' for ceilings 9'-0" and lower, 10' x 4' for ceiling 10'-0" or lower). Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Type: Type Y where required for fire -resistive -rated assemblies. Edges: Tapered Thickness: 1/2 inch. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated.' Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board, Domtar Gypsum. Firestop Type C, Georgia-Pacific Corp. Fire -Shield G, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core, United States Gypsum Co. Glass -Mat Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178, of type and thickness indicated below: Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dens -Glass units manufactured by Georgia Pacific Corp. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER BOARDS FRP Panels: ASTM E 84, Class A fiberglass reinforced polyester resin board, 4' x 10', height indicated, 1/8" thick. Color: As selected from the manufacturer's standards. TRIM ACCESSORIES Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: Material: Formed metal, complying with the following requirement: Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process. 898-07 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES, CONT Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: Cornerbead on outside corners. LC -bead with both face and aback flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead where indicated. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. Product has flame -spread and smoke -developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound specifically recommended for laminating gypsum boards to masonry. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557. Steel drill screws, Type S bugle head complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: Fastening gypsum board to wood members. Gypsum Sheathing Screws: S-12 type, cadmium -plated. FRP Vinyl Molding: Vinyl molding for division bars, inside corners and outside corners to match color of FRP Panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast -in -anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA 216. Install sound attenuation blankets after board has been installed on one side. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls as possible, and stagger not less than l'-0" in alternate courses board. 898-07 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES, CONT Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end -butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at not less than one framing member. Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end -butt joints wherever possible. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate course boards. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered. Joints at ceilings and partitions should run parallel to the direction of the strongest light source. The Contractor should coordinate joint direction with lighting layout and window or other direct lighting sources to insure minimum joint shadowing. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" open.space between boards. Do not force into place. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports of gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional support at openings and cutouts. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber including floor joists and headers. Instead, float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. Form control joints and expansion joints with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. Where partitions intersect open concrete joists and other structural members, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by joists and other structural members; allow 1/4-tol/2-inch-wide joints to install sealant. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's recommendations but in no case over 12" o.c. GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows: On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. Wall Tile Substrate: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, comply with the following: Install glass -mat water-resistant gypsum backing board panels to comply with manufacturer's installation directions. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: Fasten to wood supports with single nailing. 898-07 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES, CONT Direct -Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is indicated to be directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set. INSTALLATION OF FRP PANELS Adhesively apply FRP Panels to water resistant backing board in strict adherence with manufacturer's recommendation and ispecifications. Provide silicone seal and in all division and edge molding as panels, are set into trim. See Section 07900 Joint Sealers. Provide coved vinyl edge at bottom; of panel and to quarry tile base and silicone seal all edges. INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant -filled (including expansion joints). Install J-type semi -finishing trim where indicated, and where exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied moldings. PROTECTION OF WORK Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protecting gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period. 898-07 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 5 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Definition: Tile includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic materials. Extent of tile work is indicated on drawings and schedules. Types of tile work in this section include the following: Glazed paver tile. See Schedule at end of the Section. Related Sections include the following: Division 3 Section "Cast -in Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. DEFINITIONS Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.65. Load -bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide installations rated for the following load -bearing performance level based on testing assemblies according to ASTM C 627 that are representative of those indicated for this Project: Moderate: Passes cycles 1 through 10. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified. Tile Samples for Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of tile indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. Samples for Verification: of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Full size samples for each type of tile, grout, trim, accessory and for each color required. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 898-07 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1 CERAMIC TILE, CONT QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualification: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the work. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 deg F in tiled areas during installation and for seven days after completion, unless higher temperatures required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. EXTRA MATERIALS Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Drawings are based on: Bella Cera "Canyon", 13x13, #1005 Mesa. MANUFACTURERS Approval of materials from manufacturers, other than what drawings are based on, is required prior to bid. submit actual samples for approval. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include the following: Manufacturers of Glazed Paver Tile: Drawings are based on: Stephens Company "Romani", Arena Manufacturers of Dryset Mortars: American Olean Tile Co., Inc. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. L & M Mfg., Inc. 898-07 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 2 CERAMIC TILE, CONT Laticrete International, Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. Latex -Emulsion -Based Latex -Portland Cement Mortars: American Olean Tile Co., Inc. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. L & M Mfg. Inc. Laticrete International Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. Manufacturers of Commercial Portland Cement Grouts: American Olean Tile Co., Inc. Bostik Construction Products Div. Custom Building Products C-Cure Chemical Co., Inc. L & M Mfg., Inc. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. Acrylic Emulsions for Latex -Portland Cement Grouts: DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. L & M Mfg. Inc. Laticrete International Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. Manufacturers of Tile Cleaners: Hillyard Chemical Co. L & M Mfg. Co., Inc. PRODUCTS, GENERAL ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 "Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, grades and other characteristics of tile indicated. Provide tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standard referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles. TILE PRODUCTS Glazed Paver Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: Composition: Vitreous natural clay. Facial Dimensions: 13 x 13 inches. Thickness: 3/8 inch. Face: Plain with cushion edges. SETTING MATERIALS Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: Provide product complying with ANSI A118.4 and the following requirement for composition: Mixture of Dry -Mortar Mix and Latex additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry -mortar mix and liquid -latex additive complying with the following requirements. Water emulsion of type described below, serving as a replacement for part or all of - gauging water, added at job site to prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex manufacturer. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. GROUTING MATERIALS Latex -Portland Cement Grout: Provide product complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, composed as follows: Mixture of Dry -Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory -prepared, dry -grout mix and latex additive complying with the following requirements: Unsanded Dry -Grout Mix: Dry -set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.3, for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. Sanded Dry -Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints 1/8 inch and wider. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard. 898-07 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 CERAMIC TILE, CONT Grout Type: Dry -set grout specified or supplied by latex manufacturer. Use latex additive without a retarder with dry -set grout. Application: Use to grout joints in glazed wall tile unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout when required. Material is to be compatible with tile and mortar/grout products, and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is that is specially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers written instructions. Add materials, and additives in accurate proportions. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment and mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films, old mortar or adhesives and old V.A. tile or carpet adhesive and curing compounds, and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile -setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry -set or latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile -setting material 898-07 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 4 CERAMIC TILE, CONT manufacturer=s written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer of blend tiles as Project site before installing. Field -Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces: Grout release. INSTALLATION, GENERAL TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetration so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and - center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. Expansion or Control Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints., including control, contraction and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tile. Locate joints in the surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. -= Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: For ceramic tile grouts (sand -Portland cement, dry -set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement grouts) comply with ANSI A108.10. FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch. Paver Tile: 3/8 inch. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of the installation standards. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. Tile floors composed of rib -backed tiles. 898-07 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 5 CERAMIC TILE, CONT Paver Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed method,TCA Installation method related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types: Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. Concrete Subfloor, Interior: TCA F113. Grout: Latex-portland cement, unless otherwise indicated. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Remove latex - portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to the and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage and wear. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. Schedule of Tile Finishes on next page. SCHEDULE OF TILE FINISHES See drawings for patterns and extents. Floor Space: Lobby Tile: 12 x 12 ceramic Base: - Substrate: Concrete slab Mortar: Dry Set (Factory sanded) Grout: Latex Portland Cement Remarks: TCA 113 898-07 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 6 SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY OF WORK Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules and is defined to include flooring materials, adhesives, accessories, leveling compound, floor preparation and labor required for proper installation. This Section includes the following: Vinyl composition tile. Resilient wall base. Resilient flooring accessories. Resilient carpet accessories. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit two copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient flooring, including accessories required indicating full range of color and pattern variation. Maintenance Instructions: Submit two copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance " practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. Fire Test Performance: Provide resilient flooring which complies with the following fire test performance criteria as determined by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Not less than the following rating per ASTM E 648. 0.45 watts per sq. cm. Flame Spread: Not more than 75 per ASTM E 84. Smoke Developed: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 84. Smoke Density: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 662. PROJECT CONDITIONS Maintain minimum temperature of 70 deg F in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 deg F in areas where work is completed. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 898-07 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING, CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Vinyl Composition Tile: Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries GAF Corp., Floor Products Div. Tarkett, Inc. Wall Base: Johnson Rubber Co., Flooring Accessories Div. Roppe Rubber Corp. Vinyl Plastic Inc. MATERIALS Colors and Patterns: As scheduled. RESILIENT TILE Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated). Class: Class 1 (solid color tile). Class 2 (through pattern tile). Wearing Surface: Smooth. Thickness: 1/8 inch. Size: 12-by-12 inches. RESILIENT WALL BASE Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I. Style: Cove with top -set toe. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 1/8 inch. Height: 4 inches. Lengths: Cut lengths 4 feet long. Exterior Corners: Premolded or formed on job. Interior Corners: Job -formed only. Ends: Premolded. RESILIENT ACCESSORIES Rubber Accessories: Products complying with following requirements: Product Description: Reducer strip for resilient flooring. As required Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for rubber accessories complying with requirements indicated. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 898-01 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING, CONT Seam Sealer: Formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for products indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION General: Examine areas where installation of resilient floor coverings will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with floor covering manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. Concrete Subfloors Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence of curing compounds. Prior to installation of flooring material, this contractor shall test for sufficient slab dryness using Rubber Manufacturer's Association moisture test method. The emission of moisture vapor from the floor shall not exceed 3 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hr. period. Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory. PREPARATION Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows: Concrete floors must be allowed to cure and dry for a minimum of 6 weeks before installation of resilient floor covering. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors. Control or construction joints are to be filled with latex patching compound formulated with Portland cement, fine aggregate and organic latex. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and sealers. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. Following cleaning, examine substrates to determine if there is visually any evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation or dust. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Install flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring and accessories to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. 898-07 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3 RESILIENT FLOORING, CONT Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORS Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 the at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable. Lay tiles in basket weave pattern with grain direction alternating between reversed in adjacent tiles. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES Apply wall base to walls, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed outside corner units and with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. Install inside and exterior corners before installing straight pieces. Install premolded outside corners before installing straight pieces. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug ;it to substrate. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure' with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. Damp -mop floor, being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring manufacturer's directions. Clean resilient flooring not more than four days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean resilient flooring by method recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. Apply recommended cross -linked acrylic floor wax to Vinyl Composition Tile. 898-07 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 4 SECTION 09680 - CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK The extent of each type of carpeting is indicated on the drawings, and by specifications, and is defined to include carpet, cushion and accessories. Carpet is to be direct glue -down as scheduled on the drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer: Firm with not less than two (2) years of carpeting experience, similar to work of this section. General Standard: "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" by The Carpet and Rug Institute; for definitions of terminology not otherwise defined herein, and for general recommendations and information. PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver carpeting materials in protective wrapping, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. WARRANTY Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of carpeting work during 1-year warranty period following substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCT CARPET: Direct glue -down. CARPET ACCESSORIES Carpet Edge Guard, Nonmetallic: At glue -down carpet extruded or molded vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of approved size and profile; colors selected by Architect from among standard colors available within the industry (any manufacturer). Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant type as recommended by carpet or cushion manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet -- manufacturer, for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, cushions and other carpeting products; and selected by Installer to meet project circumstance and requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION PRE -INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Installer must examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 898-07 CARPETING 09680 - 1 CARPETING, CONT Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet; apply sealer where required to prevent dusting. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. INSTALLATION General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of direction and lay of pile. Consult with Architect if questions arise about direction and lay of piles. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways. Extend carpet under open -bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. Glue -Down Installation: Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butter cuts with seaming cement. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet. Trim seams of loose filaments. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. Maintenance Materials: Deliver specified overrun and usable scraps of carpet to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9'-0" length, and pieces of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more than 8" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces as "construction waste". 898-07 CARPETING 09680 - 2 SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of wall coverings required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. Types of wall covering required include the following: Vinyl -coated fabric wall covering as noted in the Schedule of Finishes on the Drawings. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Vinyl wall covering. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming wall surfaces. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame -resistance characteristics. Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Wall Covering Material: Full -width sample, not less than 36 inches long, from dye lot used for the Work. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. -- Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface - burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide materials with the following fire hazard classifications. Flame spread 25 or less. Smoke developed 450 or less. DELIVERY AND STORAGE General: Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer and as herein specified. Deliver materials to project site in original packages or containers clearly labeled to identify manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification. ti Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store rolled goods in upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F. 898-07 WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 1 WALL COVERINGS, CONT PROJECT CONDITIONS Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F at areas of installation for at least 72 hours before and 48 hours after application of materials. Illuminate areas of installation using building's permanent lighting system; temporary lighting alone will not be acceptable. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less that 15 foot- candles (160 lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. EXTRA MATERIALS Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver to project site not less than 4 linear yards of each type, color, and pattern of wall covering installed. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS VINYL WALL COVERING: As scheduled. ADHESIVES General: Mildew -resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood -veneer wall covering and substrate application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. Adhesives: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive, primer, and sealer, produced expressly for use with selected wall covering on substrate as shown on drawings. Provide materials which are mildew -resistant and nonstaining to wall covering. ACCESSORY ITEMS Release Coat: oil base sealer or enamel undercoater for drywall substrates as called for in Division 9. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. 898-07 WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 2 WALL COVERINGS, CONT Remove switch plates, wall plates, and surface -mounted fixtures in areas where wall covering is to be applied. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt. Prime and seal substrates in accordance with wall covering manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrate. Apply surface sealer to gypsum drywall which will permit subsequent removal of wall covering without damage to paper facing. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. Prime new gypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing from packaging in area of installation not less than 24 hours before application. INSTALLATION, GENERAL General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and corners only. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. No horizontal seams. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. ADJUST AND CLEAN Replace removed plates and fixtures; verify cut edges of wall coverings are completely concealed. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall covering installation i upon completion of work, and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. 898-07 WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 3 SECTION 09910 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: Exposed interior items and surfaces: Walls Ceilings Doors Frames Cabinets Trim Exposed exterior items and surfaces: H.M. Doors & Frames Bollards Lintels and Trim Joint treatment, drywall tape, compound treatment and finish texture is part of the work of this section. Paint exposed surfaces except where the- paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mentioned an item or surface, paint the item or the surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. Do not paint prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components: Mechanical condensing units. Prefinished anodized aluminum windows or doors. Acoustic wall panels. Metal toilet enclosures and accessories. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. Light fixtures. Hardware Prefinished Metal Panels. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible areas: Foundation spaces. Furred areas. Ceiling plenums. Utility tunnels. Pipe spaces. Duck shafts. Finished metal surfaces includes the following: Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel. Chromium plate. Copper. Bronze and brass. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: Valve and damper operators. Motor and fan shafts. Linkages. Fire sprinkler heads. Sensing devices. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, (UL) Factory Mutual (FM), or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or 898-07 j PAINTING 09910 - 1 PAINTING, CONT. nomenclature plates. Related Sections include the following: Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. Division 6 Section "Architectural Columns" for shop priming exterior architectural woodwork. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants. Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for spray -applied application. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. Division 8 Section "Wood Windows" for shop priming unclad wood windows. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings. DEFINITIONS General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85 degree meter. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60 degree meter. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60 degree meter. Semi -gloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60 degree meter. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60 degree meter. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. Material List: Provide and inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. Certification by manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Samples for finish texture selection shall be submitted on 24" square sample of the specified bases material. Textured sample is to be finished with all specified coating applied to represent a finished wall. At contractors option and with the approval of the Architect samples of finish maybe applied to designated areas at the job site for review and acceptance. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions at the job site. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 by 8 inch samples of natural or stained - wood finish on actual wood surfaces. Wall Textures: Provide two 24 inch by 24 inch samples of ceiling texture on gypsum board. Ceiling Textures: Provide two 24 inch by 24 inch samples of ceiling texture on gypsum board. QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 898-07 PAINTING 09910 - 2 PAINTING, CONT. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. VOC content. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well- ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. PROJECT CONDITIONS Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F and 95 deg F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces nor during sandstorms. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 55 degrees F maintain continuous, uniform building temperature of not less that 55 degrees F for a minimum of 48 hours prior to, during and following painting and joint treatment. Ventilation: ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for drying joint treatment material immediately after its application. Prevent too rapid drying during hot weather. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory -sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with one gallon of extra paint materials for each applied color. Label each container with manufacturer, local supplier, paint color and paint code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS -, Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. 898-07 PAINTING 09910 - 3 PAINTING, CONT. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules Bpi use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: Kelly Moore Paints (K-M) The Glidden Company (Glidden). Benjamin Moore and Co., (Moore). PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). AINT MATERIALS, GENERAL Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged, job -mixed, chemical -hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and taping compounds, use formulation for each which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. Drying -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory -premixed product. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS Primer: Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish. Polystyrene Aggregated Finish for Ceilings: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product formulated with polystyrene aggregates for spray application, with surface burning characteristics of 25 per ASTM E 84, and in texture indicated. "IMPERIAL QT SPRAY Medium Texture Finish"; United States Gypsum Co. "Perfect Spray Medium"; Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 898-07 PAINTING 09910 - 4 f PAINTING, CONT. Finish for Walls: Texture XII Drywall Surfacer (aggregated): United States Gypsum Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION Examine substrates and conditions with the Applicator present, under which joint work and painting will be performed for compliance with paint and finish application requirements. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. Start of painting and joint work will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Prior to application, notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. PAINTING PREPARATION General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items -= reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. Cleaning: Before applying paint or surface treatments, clean the substrates that could impair the bond of various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, doors, counters, cases, and paneling. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. r Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. (SSPC). Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 898-07 PAINTING 09910 - 5 PAINTING. CONT. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum -based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. APPLICATION General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles, Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. Sand lightly between each succeeding coats on wood or metal. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturers directions. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch up painted. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, weld, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 898-07 PAINTING 09910 - 6 PAINTING, CONT. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. FINISHING OF DRYWALL General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints penetrations; fastener heads, surfaces defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: Embedding and First Coat: Ready -mix setting -type all-purpose or taping compound. Full (Second) Coat: Ready -mix setting -type all-purpose or topping compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready -mix setting -type all purpose or topping compound. APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall and other surfaces in strict accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply 'Sheet Rock' First Coat primer to all surfaces to achieve texture finish. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to - receive finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform texture matching Architect's sample without starved spots or other evidence of thin application, and free of application patterns and lines. -- Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows, light fixtures, equipment, electrical boxes and other adjoining construction. CLEANING Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 898-07 PAINTING 09910 - 7 PAINTING, CONT. 8 PROTECTION t Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDC. P1. r i L I 1 4 898-07 PAINTING 09910 - 8 i t PAINTING, CONT. PAINT SCHEDULE EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS Provide following paint systems for various substrates as indicated. Galvanized Metal: (Electrical and Gas Risers) *1st Coat - None Required (solvent clean with VM&P Naptha,97-726)(PPG Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209) 2nd Coat - PPG Speedhide Latex House Paint 6-610 3rd Coat - PPG Speedhide Latex House Paint 6-610 Not less than 3.0 mils dry film. * Omit primer where paint grip galvanized iron is used. Ferrous Metal: (Lintels barrier post, doors and frames) ENAMEL: 1st Coat - Pittsburgh Inhibitive Red Primer No. 6-203, brushed. 2nd Coat - Pittsburgh Speedhide Exterior -Interior Enamel 3rd Coat - Pittsburgh Speedhide Exterior -Interior Enamel First coat not required on items delivered shop primed. INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated. Gypsum Drywall Systems: ENAMEL: 1st Coat - Sand finished texture with Latex Primer -Sealer 2nd Coat - Pittsburgh Speedhide Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel 6-510 3rd Coat - Pittsburgh Speedhide Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel 6-510 2.5 mils dry film thickness. SEAL: Apply one coat of clear or orange shellac over gypsum board where vinyl wall fabric is to be applied. Woodwork and Trim: ENAMEL: 1st Coat - Pittsburgh Water Base Undercoater 6-755 2nd Coat - Pittsburgh Speedhide Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6-510 3rd Coat - Pittsburgh Speedhide Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6-510 Not less than 4.5 mils dry film thickness. Stained Woodwork: VARNISH: 1st Coat - Pittsburgh Rez Sealer Primer 77-1 2nd Coat - Pittsburgh Super Satin Wood Rez 77-9 3rd Coat - Pittsburgh Super Satin Wood Rez 77-9 Interior Metal Frames: 1st Coat - Pittsburgh Inhibition Red Primer 6-203, brushed 2nd Coat - Pittsburgh Speedhide Exterior -Interior Enamel (spray) 3rd Coat - Pittsburgh Speedhide Exterior -Interior Enamel (spray) First coat may be omitted on shop primed items. 898-07 PAINTING 09910 - 9 SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of specialty signs is shown on drawings. Provide signage at accessible toilets. Forms of specialty signs required include the following: Interior panel signs adhesive and mechanically attached. Metal pole mounted sign at parking. Tubular traffic markers. QUALITY ASSURANCE Compliance: Signage to meet requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act, Texas -- Accessibility Standards and the American National Standards Institute A117.1 standards. Signs which designate permanent rooms and spaces, shall have raised letters and numerals 1/32" from the surface of the sign in upper case, sans serif or simple serif, and be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be between 5/8" and 2" high. Braille dots to comply with Specification #800 National Library Service, National Library of Congress specifications for standard literary Braille. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Drawings are based on: "Braille - Tac" P101 and P102 Interior Signage. "Best Manufacturing Sign Systems" Traffic Signage. MATERIALS Fasteners: Use mechanical concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated, which are fabricated from metals which are non -corrosive to either sign materials or mounting surface. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot -dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. Furnish toggle bolt at each interior drywall construction. Post: 2" diameter galvanized pipe. FABRICATION OF PANEL SIGNS General: Fabricate panel signs to comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16" measured diagonally from corner to corner. 898-07 SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 1 SPECIALTY SIGNS, CONT Unframed Interior Panel Signs: Fabricate unframed panel signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements: Size: 6" x 811. Thickness: .125 inches for injected molded signs. Edge Condition: Square cut. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2" radius. Typical Signage size or copy size may vary from sizes stated to accommodate excessive or large copy as scheduled at no additional cost. Provide stock pictograms and copy signs at toilets. Typestyle: - Optima Bold. Pictograms - P101 (Men/Figure/Access) at the Men's toilet. - P102 (Women/Figure/Access) at the Women's toilet. Provide information signage at front doors. Size: 3" X 10". Thickness: .125 inches. Edge Condition: Square cut. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2" radius. 1" letters on contracting background stating @This Door To Remain Unlocked When Building Is Occupied@ Unframed Exterior Post Signs: Fabricate using flat aluminum sheets with baked enamel finish with screen printed copy. Provide international symbols as indicated on drawings. Size: 12" x 18". Thickness: .005. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2" radius. Sign size or copy may vary provided overall product meets compliance requirements. See plans for typical copy. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION General: Locate sign units and accessories where shown or scheduled, using mounting methods of type described and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify mounting locations of all signs before installation and install to meet ADA-AG and TAS mounting heights and locations. All room signage must be mounted beside the door. Addition signage may be mounted on the door. Install sign units level, plumb and at height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects of appearance. Panel Signs: Wall -Mounted Units: Attach panel signs to wall and/or door surfaces using silicone adhesive and mechanically fastened mounting: Use standard liquid or high grade industrial silicone adhesive recommended by sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous or vinyl -covered wall surfaces. Use double -sided vinyl tape where recommended by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured. Post Mounted Signs: Install post as indicated on the drawing with coupling installed at grade. Set post in concrete footing as noted. Install sign to post using non -corrosive through -bolt fasteners extending through both faces of the mounting pipe. Exterior Parking Sign: For wall or post mounting, see AParking Accessories@ sign detail on the plan. 898-07 SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 2 rJ SECTION 10520 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Portable fire extinguishers. Fire -Protection cabinets for the following: Portable fire extinguishers. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire -protection specialties. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Extinguishers and Cabinets: J.L. Industries. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. Potter -Roemer, Inc. MATRRTAT.A Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial quality, stretcher leveled, temper rolled. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 1-A:10-B:C, 2-1/2-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. 898-07 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 1 FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES, CONT FIRE -PROTECTION CABINETS Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. Cabinet Metal: Enameled -steel sheet. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following: Fire extinguisher. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions: Semi -recessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Square -edge trim with 1-1/2-inch backbend depth. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer=s standard, as follows: Same metal and finish as door. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. Enameled steel sheet. Copper -alloy sheet, bronze. Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard, as follows: Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as follows: Class 1 (clear). Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 MM. Bubble: One-piece molded acrylic. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, as follows: Vertical duo panel with frame. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam -action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide continuous -type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Identify bracket -mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to wall surface. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. Application Process: Silk screen. Lettering Color: Red. Orientation: Vertical. COLORS AND TEXTURES Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics. FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 898-07 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 2 FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES, CONT Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying temporary strippable protective covering prior to shipping. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. STEEL CABINET FINISHES Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces complying with SSPS-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5 (white metal blast cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (pickling). Baked -Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two -coat baked -enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard choices for color and gloss. Paint the following: (below is also under "Finishes, General") Exterior of cabinet, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. Interior of cabinet. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets are to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fie -protection specialties Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb. INSTALLATION OF FIRE -RATED HOSE OR VALVE CABINET Seal through penetrations with one -part firestopping sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 898-07 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 3 SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings and schedules. This Section includes the following: Grab bars. Mirror units. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: Construction details and dimensions. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. Material and Finish Descriptions. Features that will be included for Project. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. COORDINATION Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Basis -of -Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. American Bathroom Accessories, Inc. American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation. Continental Mfg. Co. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO) 898-07 r TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES. CONT MATERIALS Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (22 gage) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch (20 gage) minimum nominal thickness. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot -dip zinc coating. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 min thick. le seam Comply with American Disability Act - Accessibility Guidelines and the Texas Accessibility Standards. Grab Bar: Basis -of -Design Product: GAMCO 150C-42 Side Bar; 150C-36 Back Bar Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. Configuration and Length: Straight, 36 inches long at rear. Straight, 48 inches as side of water closet. MIRROR UNITS Mirror Unit: Basis -of -Design Product: Frame: Stainless -steel channel. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft -resistant installation, using method indicated below. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall -hanger device with spring -action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. Size: As indicated on Drawings. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion -resistant backing plates. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Owner's representative. 898-07 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES, CONT PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 898-07 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 SECTION 15000 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS: The Contractor and each subcontractor shall read and comply with all sections of these specifications, including the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, information to bidders, and all other pertinent documents issued by Architect. All such items are hereby incorporated into and become a part of these specifications. If conflicts exist between the General Conditions and these Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical, the latter shall govern. PRECEDENCE: The mechanical systems, including piping, shall have precedence over the electrical systems. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: Drawings and specifications shall be considered cooperative, and work or materials called for by one and not mentioned in the other shall be done and furnished as though treated by both. In case of discrepancies in figures, drawings or specifications, the Architect shall be notified before the signing of the Contract and his decision on said discrepancies shall be adjusted by the Contractor only at the Contractor's expense, and in case of any settlement of any complication rising from such adjustment to the Contract, Contractor shall bear all extra expenses involved. COORDINATION OF TRADES The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for the following: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires (including control wiring) 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details _ Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. All items specified under Division 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. UTILITY CONNECTIONS: Note that where utility connection locations are referenced by the word "verify" or "approximately", the exact locations shall be determined by the Contractor, with any and all utility connections made by the Contractor as required, with no increase to the Owner above the price indicated on the Contractor's proposal. 898-07 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECH. & ELEC. 15000 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL 5 ELECTRICAL. CONT SITE EXAMINATION: Bidders shall visit the site to satisfy themselves as to the nature and scope of the work to be done. Information shown or not shown on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility. The submission of a bid will be taken as evidence that site examination has been made and all conditions which will effect the work have been taken into consideration. Special care should be taken to review Owner furnished equipment to be used.. DEMOLITION - GENERAL: Note on the plans and in the general construction specifications, any demolition requirements included in this portion of the specifications. CODES: All work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and National codes, ordinances, and regulations governing the particular class of work involved. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this section to suit these requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict in arrangements with code requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplementary drawings required, illustrating how the work may be installed in order to comply, and on approval of the change by the Architect, shall install the work in a satisfactory manner, without additional cost to the Owner. FEES AND PERMITS: The Contractor and each subcontractor shall secure all permits and licenses required for work, shall pay all fees in connection with such permits and licenses, and shall deliver all certificates of inspection to the Owner. CONSTRUCTION ("AS BUILT") DRAWINGS: At the completion of this project, the Contractor shall provide the owner two sets of plans showing all piping and conduit systems, valves, and equipment installed by the Contractor. These drawings shall be correct in every detail and shall incorporate all changes made in the course of the project. These drawings shall be prepared in such manner as to enable the Owner to properly operate, maintain and repair both exposed and concealed work. Drawings shall be in red ink on blue line prints. PROTECTION OF WORK AND MATERIALS: The Contractor shall protect the work and all materials (whether incorporated in the building or not) and shall cover openings to protect the building from the weather. The Contractor shall provide protection of all work in progress and shall be responsible for all damage done to the Owner's property or to any adjacent properties during the construction. PART 2 - MATERIALS SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of materials and equipment which he proposes to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to each item as well as complete capacity data and ratings of each piece of equipment showing compliance with all required capacities. Should the Contractor fail to make this submission within four weeks following the signing of the Contract Documents, the Architect reserves the right to require the Contractor to furnish items exactly as mentioned herein. Submittal data shall verify that the items offered will fit the space requirements. Simple summary sheets alone are not acceptable. Such sheets shall be accompanied by calculations, charts, graphs, tabulation tables, etc., enabling the reviewer to do detailed review of equipment selections. Any item furnished with approval of the Architect (in lieu of the item specified), which in the opinion of the Architect does not perform satisfactorily, shall be replaced by the Contractor with the item originally specified, at no additional cost to the Owner or Architect. This provision shall be applicable to any item within the warranty period. See Division 1 for further requirements. 898-07 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECH. & ELEC. 15000 - 2 i SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL, CONT SHOP DRAWINGS Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of each Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect/Engineer reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary, and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. See Division 1 for further requirements. MATERIALS: All materials shall be new and of the quality indicated by the specifications, unless noted otherwise. Where manufacturers' names are mentioned in these specifications, it has been done to establish a standard of quality and construction. Where one brand name only is specified for any item, the Contractor shall limit his choice to the brand name shown. Note that the brand name used as a basis of design is shown in schedules. Where the clause "or approved equal" occurs, other brand names will be accepted, provided they meet the standards of quality and performance established by the specifications. All substitutions shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer. SUBSTITUTIONS: Necessary changes in the work of any trades resulting from approved substitutions by the Contractor shall be paid for by the Contractor making the substitution. PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL PIPING, CABLING, AND CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS: The Contractor shall furnish and install (including all labor and materials required) the various piping systems as herein specified, adhering to the general routing and methods of distribution shown on the drawings. All required pipe, fittings, hangers, valves, sleeves, inserts, gages, thermometers and such other items and appurtenances that may be required for the satisfactory operation of the various systems, shall be included. All piping, cabling, and conduits shall be installed in a direct, neat, and workmanlike manner, employing only mechanics skilled in each respective trade. Exposed lines shall be run parallel with, or perpendicular to, building lines, and wherever possible shall be grouped together for easier service and identification. Lines which require a definite grade for draining shall have precedence in routing over all other lines. Wherever possible, horizontal and vertical lines shall be held as closely as possible to the walls, ceilings, struts, members, etc., so as to occupy the minimum space consistent with the proper requirements for insulation, expansion, removal of pipe and access to valve, dampers, etc. In general, all piping, cabling, and conduit in finished areas of the building shall be ---3 run concealed in chases, furrings, above suspended ceilings, etc., unless noted (or directed) otherwise. Should any condition arise which would cause any piping to be F=, exposed in finished areas, it shall immediately be called to the Architect's attention, and the Contractor shall bear any and all expense in connection with arranging his work as directed to facilitate its concealment. Conduit may be exposed on walls where concealment is not required. All such exposed conduit shall be run straight and true without offsets or bends, and shall be perfectly vertical or horizontal. All conduit shall have couplings and connectors as noted in the Electrical Specifications. 898-07 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECH. & ELEC. 15000 - 3 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL, CONT The mechanical plans do not give all details concerning elevation of lines, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and -other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines to avoid all obstructions, and to conform to details on installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed; and thereby to provide an integrated, -satisfactory operating installation. SLEEVES FOR PIPES AND CONDUITS Where pipes, conduit, cabling, and E.T.M. pass through floors and walls, galvanized steel pipe sleeves shall be used. Properly seal sleeves and penetrations through rated wall or smoke partitions to maintain the rating. Sleeves through roof decks shall be 26 gauge sheet metal. Sleeves in pipe chases shall extend 1-1/2 inch above the floor slab and be cemented in a watertight manner. The size of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the insertion of pipe of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of sleeves shall be at least 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulated line. Where these sleeves occur in walls having a waterproofing coating, the sleeves shall have flanges welded on them to build into the waterproofing. When pipes are installed, the angular space between the pipe and the sleeve shall be effectively sealed using an approved mastic sealer. No plumbing pipes shall be installed directly in the concrete, or set directly in masonry walls. FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES AND FLANGES Unless otherwise noted, provide and install chromium plated sectional floor and ceiling plates around all pipes and conduits passing exposed through the wall, floors or ceilings. Plates shall be sized to fit outside of insulation on lines, etc., but to fit snugly. Solid plates with set screws shall be used on any lines where the sectional plates will not stay in place or are not available in adequate size. Provide flanges, covers and plates to finish out all devices to final finishes and coverings at walls, floors and ceiling. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (PLUMBING, MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL) All pipe throughout the building, both horizontal and vertical, shall be adequately supported with clamps or hangers sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. Provide devices manufactured specifically for the hanging of lines and pipes being supported. No piping conduit or lines are to be supported with wire or plumbing straps. At the bases of lines where required for the proper support, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. Individual horizontal lines shall be adequately supported using hangers that are sized to fit the pipe. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported on continuous hangers, provided pipes are running parallel to the same elevation and grade. For particular conditions, other special hangers may be employed. Hangers shall be manufactured by Kindorff, Unistrut, Elcen, or approved equal. All horizontal plumbing and mechanical pipes and electrical conduit supported from the construction shall be suspended on rods not smaller than the manufacturer's recommendations for the loads imposed, and provided with hanger adjustors. Inserts (when used) shall be set in place before concrete is poured. Use special supports where required by particular conditions at the site. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support the horizontal piping, but in no case shall hangers be located on centers greater than six feet for 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch lines, seven feet for 1 inch lines, eight feet for 1-1/4 inch lines, nine feet for 1-1/2 inch lines, ten feet for 2 inch and 2-1/2 inch lines, and twelve feet for larger lines. For soil lines, hangers shall be 5'-0" on horizontal runs, and where required by the 898-07 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECH. & ELEC. 15000 - 4 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL, CONT conditions, hangers shall be more closely spaced. Provide and install any braces required to prevent excess side way of lines, taking care not to restrict any necessary expansion of lines. Twenty gauge 10" long galvanized sleeves or saddles shall be used with hangers installed over insulated pipe. Where pipes of different trades may possibly be racked on the same supporting structure, the Contractor shall provide the necessary coordination between the various trades to properly locate the supporting members. The various trades shall cooperate with each other to the end that the same type of hangers may be used throughout insofar as practicable. All exposed vertical lines shall be braced from the wall construction at no less than two points, one of which shall be approximately six feet above the floor, to prevent sidewise motion of risers. Braces shall be as specified for multiple pipes, and supports at each slab shall be with Kindorff or approved equal, C-210 clamps. In the case of insulated lines, oversize hangers of clamps as required shall be installed. Hangers, anchors, and related items installed in direct contact with copper pipe shall be bronze, copper or copper -plated steel. Hangers, anchors, and related items which support ferrous piping shall be steel with galvanized coating. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc., shall be governed, in part, by this consideration. CUTTING AND PATCHING: The Contractor under each section shall either perform or arrange for any cutting and patching required in the installation of his work. All patching shall be done in such manner that the surrounding work will be restored to its original conditions. See Division 1, Cutting and Patching, for further requirements. At unfinished surfaces, the Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of work installed hereunder. At finished surfaces, the General Contractor shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work specified herein, and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. All openings cut through the roof or exterior walls shall be provided with a temporary _ watertight cover during the construction or until permanent installation or,repair has been made. All pipe and conduit run through the roof shall be installed in pitch pockets installed for flashing prior to the installation of the roofing. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. Where openings are cut through roof deck, the contractor of each respective trade shall neatly cut deck to required opening size. Do not punch or hammer through deck. COVER: A11 electrical lines installed underground shall have a minimum of 24 inches cover, from the top of the line to the finished grade. All underground gas, water and waste lines shall have a minimum of 18 inches cover from the finished grade to the top of the line unless otherwise noted. SOIL CONDITIONS: This specification and drawings in no way stipulate the conditions of the soil to be encountered. When excavation may be required in execution of the work, this Contractor agrees that he has informed himself regarding conditions affecting the work, labor and materials required, without recourse to any representation of soil conditions that may appear or seem to be implied in any portion of the Contract Documents. 898-07 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECH. & ELEC. 15000 - 5 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL, CONT EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING: Trenches for underground pipes shall be excavated by the Contractor to the required depths, and bell holes shall be provided to insure uniform bearing. Excavation below grade shall be refilled with sand, or gravel firmly compacted. Where rock is encountered, it shall be excavated to a grade 3 inches below the lower -most part of the pipe and the trench shall be refilled to the grade as above specified. Trenches shall be sheathed or braced, and pumping or bailing performed as may be necessary to protect the workmen and adjacent structures, and to permit proper execution of the work. After pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and approved by the Architect, the trenches shall be backfilled with approved materials, tamped or otherwise thoroughly compacted in place. Backfill for trenches in areas under slabs shall be placed in eight inch layers and each layer compacted to not less than 90% of maximum density. See Section 02200, Earthwork for other requirements. LIMITS AND REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WIRING Except for those items normally wired at their point of manufacture and so delivered, and unless specifically noted to the contrary herein or on the drawings, the Electrical Contractor under the Electrical Section of the specifications will furnish and install all conduit, wire, junction boxes, and conduit fittings; will do all electrical wiring at panelboards, motor starters, at the motor junction or terminal boxes; and shall install and connect all electrical devices for the temperature control system. The Mechanical Contractor under the Heating Air Conditioning Section of these specifications shall erect each motor in its respective place. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS All electric services required for the complete installation of the temperature control system shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor and turned over to the Electrical Contractor for installation and connection. Temperature controls shall be installed in accordance with wiring diagrams furnished by the Mechanical Contractor and approved by the Architect. Damage to equipment caused by deviation from the methods shown in the diagrams shall be paid for by the Electrical Contractor. ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner -furnished equipment. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect, and finally connect as directed by the Architect. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contractors or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings and verify connection and services to equipment before such services are installed. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 898-07 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECH. & ELEC. 15000 - 6 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL, CONT COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS Before acceptance and final payment, the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, showing all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. CLEANUP: The Contractor shall remove from the building and the plan site all rubbish and dirt as it accumulates under the Contract. At completion, all areas shall be broom cleaned, and all obstructions, surplus materials, etc., removed. See Division 1 for further requirements. TESTING: The Contractor under each division shall, at his own expense, perform the various tests specified and others that may be required by National, State, and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. Any leaks or defective materials found shall be repaired and replaced and test shall be repeated until no further leaks or defects are indicated. GUARANTEE: Each Contractor shall guarantee all labor and materials furnished by him for a period of one year unless specifically stated otherwise. Guarantee period shall extend from the time of final acceptance of the building. The guarantee shall cover the repair or replacement, without additional cost the Owner, of any defective material or faulty workmanship. 898-07 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECH. & ELEC. 15000 - 7 SECTION 15110 - PLUMBING GENERAL: The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect are hereby incorporated in these specifications and form a part thereof. SCOPE OF WORK: The work covered by these specifications consist of the furnishing of all equipment, materials, labor, fees, permits, meters, paving cuts, and certificates of inspection that may be required for the installation of the plumbing work. See Supplementary General Conditions for further requirements. The work shall include, but not be limited to the following items: Plumbing fixtures as shown and scheduled Domestic Water Piping Drains, Vents and Sewer Floor Drains Insulation Natural Gas Piping Condensate and indirect drain lines MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE: See "Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical." REGULATIONS AND ORDINANCES: See "Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical." UTILITIES CONNECTIONS: Gas, water, and sewer connections shall be made at the approximate locations and in the manner shown. Verify exact location availability and connections required to all utilities. This contractor will be responsible for paving or sidewalk cuts, meters, and all other items that may be required for the installation of the utilities shown, specified and required by code. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: See "Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical" and Division 1. CUTTING AND PATCHING: See "Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical." SOIL AND WASTE PIPE: Soil and waste pipe under the concrete slabs in the building and outside the building shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Waste drain and vent lines above the slab shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Connections to vertical stacks may be made with sanitary tees, and short 1/4 bends. Changes in direction of horizontal pipe shall be made with wyes, combination wye and 1/8 bends, or long sweep 1/4, 1/8, and 1/15 bends. Soil and waste pipe in the building shall be graded 1/4" per foot when possible, but not less than 1/8" per foot in any case. TRAPS: All traps underfloor shall be PVC deep seal P-traps. P-traps for lays., sinks, etc., shall be Schedule 40 PVC with compression fittings. CLEANOUTS: Cleanouts in finished floors shall be Wade W6000. Cleanouts in finished walls shall be Wade W-8460-R S.S. Top. Cleanouts at exterior grade shall be Wade W8550B-US cast iron caulk ferrules with brass plugs set in 24" x 24" x 4" concrete pads. VENTS: Vents shall be Schedule 40 PVC or ASB Type 1 plastic. WATER PIPING: All domestic water piping in the building above the floor, unless otherwise noted, shall be TYPE "L" Copper, with brass or wrought copper fittings. Cast fittings will not be accepted. All connections shall be made using 95-5 or silver solder. Piping under slabs and grade shall be Type "L" Copper installed in loop system 898-07 PLUMBING 15110 - 1 PLUMBING, CONT without joints under slab. Provide red and blue plastic .006 mil pipe guard sleeving at all hot and cold water lines under slab and up 4" above slab. All water piping shall be routed in wall furring space or under slab or floor whenever possible. Do not install any water piping in attic spaces or above ceilings without prior approval by the Owner and Architect unless specific lines are shown and noted on the drawings. All connections between ferrous and non-ferrous materials shall be made with di -electric insulating unions, or fittings. Isolate all water line penetrations through the floor slab or masonry walls with insulation. GAS LINES SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL: Gas piping underground and 8" above grade shall be covered with "X-TRU-COAT" plastic coating. Fitting and welds shall be covered with the same material, field applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Provide 150 lb. banded malleable iron fittings. Make final connection to all items of equipment, as shown and required, using unions and shut-off valves in each location. PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS: See "Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical". SLEEVES: See "Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical". ESCUTCHEONS: See "Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical". AIR CHAMBERS: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. VALVES: Valves for water service shall be Nibco, Husky No. 65. Interior and exterior hose bibbs shall be Nibco No. 70-3/4 with screw fittings. Gas line valves, unless otherwise noted, shall be Nordstorm No. 142, or approved equal. PLUMBING FIXTURES: All fixtures shall be new, of first quality, and free of blemishes or defects. Fixtures shall be protected by building paper or other suitable means, and be in perfect condition at completion of the job. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass unless specifically noted as PVC. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum beakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers. All fixtures shall have stop valves. Generally, all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with wall hangers or chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. All fixtures mounted in accessible toilets to be mounted to State and Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). Flush tank lever controls at accessible toilets to be installed to be operated on 'wide side' of stall. All fixtures are to meet ADAAG and State standards. 898-07 PLUMBING 15110 - 2 PLUMBING, CONT Where fixtures mate with irregular walls, the joint shall be grouted with plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. INSULATION: For all hot water lines above and below slab provide 1-1/2" thick ASJ/SSL Owens-Corning fiberglass 2-piece insulation with Zestone insulation and jackets at fittings. Condensate and Coil Pan Drain Lines: Provide Type `L' copper drain lines. Slope to drain to nearest drain. Provide deep seal trap in drain line. Temperature and Pressure Relief Drain Lines: Provide type ILI copper drain line from each T S P valve to exterior. Terminate with ILI fitting. Drain line shall match size of T 6 P valve and shall not be routed up at any location. Tests: All tests required by the Owner or Architect, by local authorities, or as specified shall be done by this contractor, without additional costs to the Owner. Defects found by test shall be immediately repaired, and the test repeated. Test all - lines before insulation is installed. Waste soil and vent piping shall be tested at completion of rough -in. Close opening with screw -plugs, and water test. Test shall last one hour without appreciable loss of water. With 4 foot high water column. Cold water piping shall be tested (hydrostatic test) for one hour at a gage pressure of 100 lbs. No plumbing shall be done during test period. Gas piping shall be air tested at 30 lbs. gauge pressure for one hour. No drop allowed. Any leaks found as a result of the tests shall be repaired immediately, and the test shall be repeated. Guarantee: See "Supplementary General Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical". DISINFECTING After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period ' of not less than 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 gpm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. 898-0"1 PLUMBING 15110 - 3 SECTION 15180 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING - General: The "General Conditions," and "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical" documents issued by the Architect are hereby incorporated in these specifications and form a part thereof. SCOPE OF WORK: The work covered by these specifications consist of the furnishings of all equipment, materials, labor, fees, permits, and certificates of inspection that may be required to complete the heating, ventilating and air conditioning work specified, shown on the drawings, and required by Code. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following items: Filters Ducts (supply, return and exhaust) Grilles, registers and diffusers. Controls Insulation. A.C., heating, and exhaust equipment. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS: See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical" and Section 1631 and Bid Proposal Form. REGULATIONS AND ORDINANCES: See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE: See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." MOTORS AND STARTERS: See "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: Flexible connections for duct work shall be Ventfabrics or approved equal, "'Ventfab", U.L. approved, fire resistant, 20 ounce canvas, minimum 61' width. Flexible connections shall be installed in all duct work at equipment connections. Flexible connections outside the building shall be water tight. Provide flexible connections at supply and return air sides of fan coil units. SHEET METAL DUCTWORK: To be constructed of galvanized steel sheets, suitable for low velocity systems as hereinafter specified. Unless otherwise approved, ducts shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated and shall be straight and smooth on the inside, with joints neatly finished. Joints for low velocity ducts shall be made substantially air tight, and no dust marks from air leaks shall show at duct joints, or connections to grilles, registers, and diffusers. Lap at the joints for low velocity system shall be made in the direction of air flow. Button punch or bolt connections in standing seams shall be spaced at fixed center not greater than 6 inches. Horizontal locks and seams of the type known as Button Punch Snap Lock may be used in lieu of Pittsburg lock. Transformation shall be made with sides pitched not to exceed a maximum of 20 degrees, 40 degrees included angle, for diverging air flow and 30 degrees, 60 degrees included angle, for converging air flow, or as indicated on the drawings. Square elbows, fittings and branch take -offs for low velocity shall be designed, constructed and installed as recommended in Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association, Duct Manual, Sections 1 and 2. All round takeoffs shall be made with 26 gage (conical) spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Take -offs or Taps to ceiling diffusers shall be furnished with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. Taps to fan terminal box shall be furnished with air scoop only. -.. Provide exterior wrap insulation around take -offs with damper control exposed for easy access. Round 28 gage sheet metal duct shall extend from take -off to within 6 feet of diffuser. Balance of run -out may be vinyl coated fiberglass flex duct. 898-07 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15180 - 1 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING, CONT Other details of duct construction, stiffeners, access doors, hangers, anchors and supports, duct joints, volume dampers, etc., shall be specified and/or indicated on the drawings. Installation of items not shown in detail or not covered by detailed specifications shall be as set forth in the Duct Manual, Section 1 - Low Velocity Systems, of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association. Splitters and Dampers: Dampers shall have accessible operating mechanism, and where operators occur in finished portions of the building, operators shall be chromium plated with all exposed edges rounded. Splitter dampers shall be operated by quadrant operators or 3/16-inch rod brought through the side of the duct with locking setscrews and bushing. Manual volume -control dampers shall be operated by locking -type and quadrant operator. Dampers and splitters shall be two gages heavier than duct in which installed. Air deflectors shall be provided in all square elbows, duct -mounted supply outlets, take -off or extension collars to supply outlets and tap -in branch -takeoff connections. Air deflectors shall be factory -fabricated and factory- or field -assembled units consisting of curved turning vanes or louver blades for uniform air distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence and pressure loss. Square elbows shall be provided with curved vanes. Duct supports shall be not less than two 1-inch by 1/16-inch thick galvanized strap -iron hangers spaced one on each side of duct in accordance with SMACNA Duct Manual. DUCT LINER All retangular supply ducts, return air ducts, fresh air ducts, exhaust ducts, (except range hood exhaust) and ducts 8• from equipment and rectangular branch ducts shall be lined with 1" thick 3/4 lb. per cubic foot density Gustin-Bacon fiber glass insulation. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips 18" on center. DIMENSIONS Rectangular unlined trunk and branch ducts for supply, return and exhaust are dimensioned to the inside of the duct. Rectangular lined trunk and branch ducts for supply, and return and exhaust are dimensioned to the inside of the duct excluding liner. Round branch ducts, flexible ducts and wrapped ducts are dimensioned to the inside dimension or diameter. FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulation blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be equal to Thermaflex M-KA. Support flex ducts with galvanized steel saddle 12" wide by 1/2 the duct outside diameter and 1"x 16 gage galvanized straps support structure. Supports max. 5'-0" o.c. Fasten flex duct to round adaptor or neck with steel or plastic clamping strap or No. 16 gage SWG minimum steel wire followed by wrapping with duct tape. Flex duct connecting to grills shall not exceed 6'-0" in length. 898-07 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15180 - 2 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING, CONT SPIN -IN OR CONICAL TAPS All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in or conical type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglas ductboard as applicable. Taps to ceiling diffusers shall be furnished with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. Taps to fan terminal box shall be furnished with air scoop only. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES All items of air distribution shall be Hart and Cooley or Krueger, Titus, or approved equal, as shown on the plans and indicated herein. All supply grills to have opposed blade dampers. Round grills to have butterfly dampers. SPLIT SYSTEM UNIT Furnish and install where shown and scheduled on the drawings, complete split system air conditioning units. Lennox, Carrier, or Trane units will be acceptable. Units must be of the same manufacturer as indicated on the nameplate. Fan Blower: Cabinet constructed of heavy gage galvanized steel with baked enamel finish and completely insulated on all sides. Direct drive multi -speed motor with choice of blower speeds. Deep corrosion resistant drain line manufacturer's standard insulated filter for 1" filter and with front access panel for removal and replacement of filter. All components completely assembled except for refrigerant and electrical connections. Coil: Constructed of precisely spaced ripple -edged aluminum fins machine fitted to copper tubes and factory leak tested under high pressure. Fully insulated coil cabinet with all connections outside of cabinet. Factory installed expansion and check valves. Heating Section: Natural gas heating capacity as scheduled on the drawings shall be furnish in the unit. Burners using 100% secondary air shall be furnished and operation shall not be affected by wind or atmospheric conditions. Burners shall have dual limits and 100% safety shut-off. High voltage ignition and re -ignition are not acceptable. Heat exchangers on all sizes of units shall be constructed of aluminized steel. Entire unit shall be AGA approved for firing with entering air at any temperature. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for a period of ten (10) years. Condenser: Durable galvanized steel cabinet with weather resistant baked enamel finish. Drainage holes at base and PVC coated steel wire condenser guard. Two stage high -efficiency hermetically compressed with built-in excessive current and temperature protection. Crank case heater, brass service valves and gauge ports for suction and liquid lines, hi -capacity dryer, high and low pressure switches with solid state timed -off control. Provide low ambient kit. Direct drive fan with vertical discharge and "U"-shaped wrap -around coil. Coil/condenser and blower matched according to ARI Standard 210 test procedures and DOE test procedures. Size: the size of the complete unit shall not exceed those indicated on the drawings. If supply and return air connections require modifications, the Contractor shall submit revised drawings for the Architects review prior to installation. All electrical components shall carry Underwriter's Laboratories label. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: This Contractor shall furnish a complete system of temperature controls to control each piece of mechanical equipment as outlined or indicated on the drawings and in the Supplementary Conditions. Provide programmable Heating/Cooling thermostat with fan `on' and auto control. 898-07 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15180 - 3 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING, CONT ADJUSTMENTS: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall balance all air systems so that all fans are delivering the scheduled CFM. OPERATING MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AND WARRANTIES: One complete set of operating -maintenance instructions and warranties shall be given the Architect for delivery to the Owner. Two complete sheets of installation instructions for each item of air conditioning equipment shall be furnished with submittal data. CLEANING, TESTING AND OPERATION: Before final acceptance of the work, all equipment and materials shall be cleaned. Any damage to equipment paint shall be repaired by this Contractor, using matching colors and materials. All motors shall be oiled with non -detergent motor oil, clean filters shall be installed prior to final inspection of the work. All filters shall be replaced. All tests required by the Architect, by local and state authorities, or as specified, shall be done by this Contractor, without additional costs to the Owner. Defects found by tests shall be immediately repaired and the tests repeated. GUARANTEES: Refer to "Supplementary General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical." 898-07 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15180 - 4 SECTION 16110 - ELECTRICAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work to be done under this section of the specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, devices, supplies and certificate of inspection that may be required to complete and leave ready for operation the electrical work specified, shown on the drawings, and required by code. Work is not limited to but includes the installation of the following: Underground electrical services. Panelboards, disconnects, and switch gear. Lighting fixtures and associated conduit, switching and wiring. Power and convenience outlets, fixture outlets, switches and controls as shown on the drawings. Conduits, junction boxes, outlets and wiring for telephone and computer systems. Conduit and junction boxes for security system. Conduit and junction boxes for temperature control system. Wiring of controls and heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE: See "Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Conditions" and Division 1. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS: See "Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Conditions" and Division 1. SUBMITTALS: Submit manufacturer's product data for all materials, devices, and fixtures. CODES: See "Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Conditions". Verify and install all systems in accordance with local and governing codes. ELECTRICAL SERVICE: The Contractor shall provide meter base and new underground 120/240 volts, 1-phase, 3-wire service to new disconnect and panel. Prior to bid, coordinate all requirements with utility provided for complete installation. GENERAL WIRING REQUIREMENTS: See "Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Conditions". At contractor's option all building wiring shall be installed in metallic raceways(EMT) or interlocked armor ground Type MC Cable. Thin wall conduit (Electrical Metallic Tubing) on all branch lighting and control circuits, except on conduit runs made in or under slab -on -fill, or where exposed to the weather. Galvanized rigid conduit shall be used for all feeder and power circuits where electrical metallic tubing is prohibited. Joints shall be made tight with standard galvanized steel compression couplings and connectors. Conduit connections to motors shall consist of twelve (12) inch length (minimum) flexible conduit, with the rigid conduit securely fastened to a wall or other non -vibrating support. Motor connections shall terminate in conduit box or "Condulet" fitting. Conduit exposed to weather shall have a durable plastic coating. Type MC Cable shall meet the following: UL 1569 Standard for Metal -Clad Cables, specifically the provisions of Section 6.1.5A. UL Standard 83 for Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires and Cables or UL Standard 44 for Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables. NEC Articles 230, 250, 300, 330. NEC Class I Div.2, Class II Div.2, & Class III Div. 1 Hazardous Locations. Federal Specification A-A59544 and pass Flame Test IEEE 1202 ' (70,000 BTU/hr) Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test. Type MC Cable is not to be used in wet locations, either direct burial, in underground conduit, or overhead. BRANCH CIRCUITS - LIGHTING AND POWER WIRING: The electrical Contractor shall furnish and install a new system of lighting and power branch circuit wiring from the new 898-07 ELECTRICAL 16110 - 1 ELECTRICAL, CONT lighting panels to the various outlets. All wiring shall be substantially as shown on the drawings. This Contractor shall furnish and install a complete system of equipment branch circuit wiring from the respective switches and/or panels to each piece of equipment, including setting and wiring of starters, disconnects, and control switches, as required and/or indicated on the drawings. No branch circuit or switch leg shall be installed with wire smaller than number twelve (#12) awg copper. For 20 amp branch circuits so indicated on drawings or in excess of 100 feet in length, number ten (#10) copper wire shall be used. Special care shall be taken so that circuits are connected to the panels in such an arrangement as to insure, insofar as possible, that loads on the different phases at the panel are balanced. CONTROL WIRING The electrical contractor shall furnish and install all control wire for the mechanical equipment. Coordinate type and location of wiring with mechanical contractor. See "Heating and Air Conditioning" for other requirements. CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of circuit breakers scheduled on the drawings, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled. Panelboards shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to the General Electric Panelboards specified or Power Mark Plus. Provide Factory installed main lugs or main breaker as scheduled on the drawings. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. All panelboards- shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. and the building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." DEVICES AND PLATES: General wiring devices and plates shall be manufactured by General Electric, Hubble, and Leviton or approved equal, and shall be similar to the following: MANUFACTURER GE HUBBLE Quiet type switches 20A, 120/211 (W-S-896) 1 pole 5951 1221 3 way 5953 1223 Occupancy Sensors Wall Switch WS-1277 Long Range Wall Switch ATD-160WRP Duplex receptacle -grounding 15 amp 5262 5262 20 amp 4108 5362 -isolated ground 15 amp IG-5262 20 amp IG-5362 Waterproof duplex receptacle -grounding 20 amp receptacle above with 9226-95 5205 Ground fault circuit interrupter 20 amp GF-5352 898-07 ELECTRICAL 16110 - 2 ELECTRICAL, CONT The insulation on all wire and cable shall be THHN and rated at 600 volts except for the low voltage control or switching circuits which may be rated at 300 volts. Number six (#6) and larger shall be stranded. All wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM, shall bear the Underwriters' approval and shall have size, voltage, and code markings stamped on insulation. Each conductor splice, connection point, outlet, switch junction or pull point shall be an outlet box with cover or plate. OUTLET BOXES: In general, all outlet boxes shall be concealed where possible, and shall be constructed of code gauge steel, galvanized inside and outside. Bracket outlets shall be installed at a height shown on the plans, or as directed on the job. Switch outlets shall be installed four feet (4'-011) above the finished floor, unless otherwise noted. Receptacle outlets shall be installed fifteen (15) inches above the floor, and 8" above cabinet tops, unless otherwise noted. Where switches or outlets are shown to be located together, double, triple or equivalent type gang boxes shall be used. Provide 2" deep shallow boxes at furred wall systems. JUNCTION BOXES: Where shown, or required, junction or pull boxes shall be provided, to facilitate pulling, splicing, taping, or nesting of conductors. Such boxes shall be of adequate size to suit the purpose, constructed of code gauge steel, galvanized outside and inside, and securely fastened to the building structure, independent of the conduit. Boxes installed outdoors shall be weather-proof, with gasketed covers and corrosion resistant screws. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: This contractor shall furnish all necessary hangers, brackets, clamps, etc., as required to properly support all conduit, and other devices and equipment in such a manner as to prevent sag and undue strain. SLEEVES AND INSERTS: See "Mechanical and Electrical Supplementary Conditions". LIGHTING FIXTURES: This Contractor shall furnish, install and wire lighting fixtures as shown and scheduled. Each fixture shall be complete with all necessary hangers, mounting devices, shades, stems, canopies, louvers, reflectors, lamps and other devices required. Fluorescent fixtures shall be with equipped electronic instant start ballast for linear lamps complying with NEMA C82.11, sound rating A. Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall be electronic with 90 percent power factor and flicker less than 5 percent. Ballasts for low -temperature environments to be electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F minus 17 deg C starting temperature. Lenses: Where acrylic lenses are specified, provide minimum thickness of 0.125 inches. Lamps: All linear lamps are to be T8-rapid start, rated 32w maximum, 2800 initial lumens, CRI of 75 (min), color temperature of 3500k with 20,000 hours rated life. VOICE/DATA OR TELEPHONE SYSTEM: This Contractor shall furnish and install a system of conduits serving telephone outlets as shown on the plans. The outlets shall be located approximately as shown or as directed by the Architect. All wall outlet boxes shall have specified cover plates, with vinyl grommets. - or standard jack receptacles. Conduits 3/4" minimum diameter, shall be provided from the 4 x 4 outlet box to telephone backboard. Coordinate and verify all requirements with Owner for computer wiring. 898-07 ELECTRICAL 16110 - 4 ELECTRICAL, CONT Waterproof duplex receptacle -grounding GFCI as above with waterproof WP26 All lighting switches shown adjacent to door jambs shall be within 6"of shown jamb. Mount all switches and controls 48" above finish floor to centerline. Mount all receptacles a minimum of 15" AFF to centerline for handicapped. See Equipment Schee and drawings for other mounting heights. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles at all exterior locations and at all outlets within 6 feet of sinks or lavatories. INCANDESCENT WALL DIMMERS where multiple dimmers are installed in multiple gang boxes follow manufacturer's recommendations for derating dimmers. MANUFACTURER LUTRON LEVITON HUNT (Decor) 1000 watts or less Nets-1000 - SC-10 1800 watts or less N-2000 - SC-20 COVERPLATES For Flush Mounted Devices: Leviton, Hubble, Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line" 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel, type 302/304. Provide single cover gang plates where two or more devices are located together at all telephones, computer switches & receptacles. SAFETY SWITCHES: Switches shall be square "D" General Electric or approved equal. Provide disconnect switches at all remote equipment locations. Switches shall meet Federal Specifications WS-865C for Type ND and Underwriters' Laboratories listed. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure unless otherwise specified. NEMA 3R (Raintight) switches shall be furnished as indicated and/or required by N.E.C. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 V.A.C. Switches shall have visible blades so that the operator can see the open blades when the switch is in the open position. Switches shall be quick -made and quick -break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the opening or closing action of the contacts has started. The operating handle shall have positive padlocking provisions in the "OFF" position. Disconnects shall be as described above, less fuses. All disconnect switches to be fuseable unless noted otherwise. Unit shall be equipped with three blades, three fuses, a full size insulated, groundable neutral and ground bus and links as shown on plans. FUSES: This Contractor shall furnish and install all fuses necessary to leave the installation complete and in working order. All fuses shall be Bussman, dual -element and/or current limiting as indicated, unless otherwise noted. Furnished to the Owner spare fuses, amounting to 3% of each size and type. WIRE: A11 conductors in conduit unless otherwise noted or specified shall be N.E.C. type "TW" copper, with conductivity equal 98% that of pure copper. All conductors and branch circuits shall be color coded in accordance with paragraph 210-5, Article 210 of the N.E.C. 898-07 ELECTRICAL 16110 - 3 ELECTRICAL, CONT Install Category 5 cable in conduit back to telephone board from each telephone and computer outlet. Properly penetrate and seal all penetrations through fire or separation walls. ROUGH -INS: This Contractor shall rough -in, and make final connections to, all items of special equipment furnished under other sections of these specifications. He shall be responsible for all such items which may be shown on plans or other than the electrical section, and/or specified in other sections of the specifications. This Contractor shall familiarize himself with all requirements for such special devices, and shall include in his bid price all items which may be required (but not furnished) by the equipment manufacturer. WIRING All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or MC Cabling unless specifically noted or specified to the contrary. CONDUIT Conduits shall be concealed in all finished parts of the building, conduits shall be neat and parallel with each other and with the lines of the building and shall be firmly secured in place by means of approved hangers, straps, and screws, and expansion shields where required. All conduits in concrete slabs shall be standard weight, rigid steel conduits, thin -wall threadless conduit with concrete -tight fittings may be used elsewhere. All conduit shall be standardized or hot galvanized on both exterior and interior surfaces. Where conduits terminate at distribution, junction or outlet boxes, they shall be secured thereto, with two locknuts and bushings. All openings in conduits larger than 2" diameter shall have two locknuts and insulation bushings. All openings in conduit, immediately upon installation, shall be capped for protection against entry from foreign matter, pending pulling in wires. All cutting of conduits shall be done squarely with a hacksaw and not with a pipe cutter, the ends to be reamed and all burrs removed after the application of thread -cutting dies. All lateral runs of conduits whenever possible and practical shall be installed so as to provide a natural drain for condensation without pockets or traps where moisture may collect. Fish wire shall be left in all empty conduits. Where conduit is installed in slabs, it must be done as soon as forms are in place and in such a manner as to not impair the strength of the slab. From each new panelboard, run 2-1" empty conduit to the attic or joist space above and terminate in an acceptable location for future extensions from the spare circuits and the panelboard. MC CABLE MC Cable assembly shall consist of all insulated circuit conductors and any insulated grounding conductors shall be cabled together and contained under an overall nonmetallic tape covering. A single bare aluminum grounding/bonding conductor shall be placed outside of the nonmetallic tape covering and have the same lay (twist) as the insulated conductor assembly. Grounding/bonding conductor shall be 8000 series aluminum -alloy conductor material, and shall be sized based on NEC table 250.122 and Table 6.1 in UL 1569. Aluminum interlocking metal tape shall be formed and helically wrapped around the cable assembly such that the interlocked armor and aluminum grounding/bonding conductor are in intimate contact throughout the entire cable. Interlocked armor shall be listed as being suitable for grounding. 898-07 ELECTRICAL 16110 - 5 ELECTRICAL, CONT Interlocked armor shall be listed and identified for grounding equivalent in performance to an NEC 250.122 sized equipment grounding conductor. Marking shall be located on the grounded (neutral) conductor and on the nonmetallic tape covering. MC Cable fitting shall be listed for use with Interlocked Armor Ground Mc Cable Type "MCI -A" and shall be listed as being suitable for grounding for use in circuits over and under 250 volts. Interlocked armor ground Type MC Cable shall be installed per the manufacturers written installation instructions. Industry guides may supplement the manufacturer's instructions. Secured and supported at intervals not exceeding six feet unless otherwise permitted in the National Electrical Code. Bends shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend should not be less than seven times the cable diameter. GROUNDING: All appliances, switches, receptacles, devices and other electrical equipment wired and connected by this contractor, shall be effectively and permanently grounded in accordance with N.E.C. and local codes. Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclosures for conductors shall be metallically joined together into a continuous electric conductor and shall be connected to all boxes, fittings, and cabinets or enclosures so as to provide an effective ground fault current path per Section 250.4 of the NEC. Circuits under 250 Volts shall be terminated per manufacturer's written installation instructions. Circuits over 250 volts shall comply with NEC, Section 250.97 where MC Cable is terminated in outlet boxes with eccentric or concentric knockouts listed under UL Category QCIT, it shall be terminated per manufacturer's written installation instructions. Where eccentric or concentric knockouts are not encountered, MC Cable shall be terminated per manufacturer's written installation instructions. Where eccentric or concentric knockouts are encountered in other than outlet boxes listed under UL Category QCIT, the aluminum grounding/bonding conductor shall be connected to the ground bus, lug or terminal of the enclosure and shall comply with NEC 110.14. A green equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to all panel enclosures, motors, and circuits as noted. WARRANTY: This Contractor shall be held responsible for all defects in equipment, materials, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of job. He shall repair or replace any defects of material, equipment, or workmanship without expense to the Owner during the warranty period. 898-07 ELECTRICAL 16110 - 6